Home

2 Use

1. ULTI CH IN 71 x 71 DIRECT E DIRECT O O O O Q x O x O 3 DSD DIRECT 5 DSD MULTI DIRECT ULTI CH DIRECT o DIRECT CINEMA 2 O x O x DIRECT MUSIC wn x x x x x x x x 8 71 O Mode selectable in initial status 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to Mode fixed when AFDM is ON 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None Selectable mode 4 You can select this when the headphone plug is inserted into the headphone jack X Non selectable mode 87 Button Input signals WMA DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD AUDIO Super Audio CD Windows Note LINEAR Media Audio DTS ES DTS ES DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DVD DVD DSD Surround mode ANALOG PCM DTS DTS 4 DSD WAV DSCRT MTRX 5 1ch 96 24 DIGITAL EX DIGITAL EX DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio Audio multi Qch 4 With Flag With Flag With Flag With no Flag 5 1 5
2. Denon Amp G Galaxi 00008 Skyworth 01464 Burmester 40420 1000 40087 40179 GE 00237 00144 Sony 01006 01460 Bush 40388 D Denon 81001 82001 83001 84001 5 40420 Gehua 00476 Sprucer 00144 Cairn 40157 Musical Fideli 40393 General Instrument 00476 00810 00276 00003 Starcom 00003 California Audio Labs 40029 40303 y 40157 Denon Tuner Gibralter 00003 StarHub 00276 Cambridge 40157 N gie WE D Denon Analog 52863 52795 52800 52805 GNI 01466 Sumitomo 01500 01504 Cambridge Audio 40157 Naim 40157 GoldStar 00144 Supercable 00276 E 40157 RES H Hitachi 00003 00008 T Taihan 00778 E Digital Tuner 4 Carver 40 57 40179 0 Onkyo 40868 40101 Hongtian Jiangsu 01462 TOL 01445 cnc 40420 5 40000 40032 40037 40087 D Denon NET 62865 62837 62838 62839 Hwalin 00303 Telewest 01068 Sm Optimus 40179 40393 40420 40468 Insight 00476 00810 Time Warner cable 01877 Copland 40393 Orion 40393 Denon iPod J Jerrold 00476 00810 00276 00003 TongKook 00840 C x Math 40032 P Panasonic 40029 40303 40388 40752 Do 72815 72816 72817 72818 01445 00003 Parasound 40420 Son Mx K 00008 Toshiba 00000 01509 AOTAN AOT Penney 40029 L ic 00144 Trans PX 00276 00303 D Denon 42867 42868 Philips 40157 Cable M Macab 00817 18 00003 00303 DKK 40000 Pioneer 40032 40101 40468 00008 00144 Madritel 01230 U United C
3. J Audio section Power amplifier Rated output Front 150W 150W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 170W 170W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 96 T H D away from microwave ovens Center and the access points of other 150W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D networks 170W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 96 T H D e There are multiple networks e Set the access point s channel Surround 150W 150W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 170 170 6 Q ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 96 T H D urround back 150W 150W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 170W 170W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 T H D 200 W 2ch 8 O ohms 340 W x 2ch 4 O ohms settings away from the channels used for other networks Alternatively connect using a network cable There are multiple networks and e Set the access point s channel 52 the usable channels overlap settings away from the channels the usable channels overlap n Played sound is interrupted or Dynamic power sound cannot be used for other networks Output connectors Front Center Surround back 6 16 O ohms played Alternatively connect using a Surround Aor B 6 16 O ohms 8 16 Q ohms network cable Analog Input sensitivity Input impedance 200 mV 47 kO kohms Frequency response 10 Hz 100 kHz 1 3 dB DIRECT mode S N 1
4. lt The display can be switched between the artist name track name SEARCH album name Playing repeatedly Press REPEAT on the sub remote control unit 1 8 TSS Selectable items All One OFF NET USB AMP mode GUI Source Select NET USB Playback Mode Repeat I page 44 Main remote control unit Playing in random order Press RANDOM on the sub remote control unit Selectable items ON OFF REPEAT RAMDOM GUI Source Select Random 1257 page 44 NET USB Playback Mode Sub remote control unit The repeat mode random mode only used when playing tracks recorded in USB Media Server About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Listening to Internet Radio Use A V toselect Internet Radio then press ENTER P Use V to select the item you want to play then press ENTER or P gt The station list is displayed Use V to select the station then press ENTER or P Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 e There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely Generally the
5. MULTI CH IN O 0 dB O ON WIDE 5 O OFF Auto 048 OFF Ss 2 x s x o o o o oon o DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx O O O NOTE1 DOLBY PRO LOGIC e 9 OFF Auto 8 6 O OFF O Auto x x O O NOTE1 DOLBY DIGITAL Q OFF Auto 0dB ON Q O OFF DTS SURROUND O OFF O Auto 0dB O ON O O OFF 7CH STEREO O OFF Auto 048 8 SUPER STADIUM O OFF Auto O 0 dB O x ROCK ARENA OFF Auto O 048 x JAZZ CLUB O OFF Auto O 0 dB x O x CLASSIC CONCERT OFF Auto 048 O OFF Auto O 0 dB x O x VIDEO GAME O OFF Auto 048 MATRIX O OFF Auto O 0 dB DOLBY x x x x x Signal Adjustable X No signal Not adjustable Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting This parameter is availabe when the IS page 46 NOTE2 This parameter is availabe when the G or Pro Logic page 46 N
6. manual adjustments settings see pages 28 30 Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit The Auto Setup screen appears automatically Sound receptor Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand with the microphone pointing directly up towards the ceiling X t is not recommended to hold it in your hand Be sure that the path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reflections may give inaccurate results When using subwoofer the following settings before starting the auto setup procedure Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible e f this is not possible then set Volume 12 o clock position Crossover frequency Maximum Highest Frequency Low pass filter Standby mode Off e Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup procedure is completed When using headphones unplug the headphones before starting the auto setup procedure Auto Setup Optimize settings for speakers in use Menu Auto Setup Auto Setup Option Parameter Check EW Auto Setup The settings are performed automatically Auto setup flow STEP1 Speaker Detection Y STEP2 Measurement 2 to 8 positions STEP3 Calculation STEP4
7. Button Input signals WMA DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD AUDIO Super Audio CD Windows Surround mode ANAL OG 2 DTS ES DISES DTS DTS DOLBY BER Ex DOEBY BUSY DOLBY DSD DSD WAV DSCRT MTRX 5168 96 24 DIGITAL EX With no DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio Audio multi ch ch 4 With Flag With Flag With Flag Flag 5 1 5 4ch A 3ch 2ch multi ch 2ch AAC FLAC STANDARD DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL EX O DOLBY DIGITAL x x 2 DOLBY DIGITAL CINEMA 2 DOLBY DIGITAL MUSIC 1 DOLBY PRO LOGIC CINEMA O X DOLBY LOGIC MUSIC O DOLBY LOGIC GAME O O O O DOLBY PRO LOGIC CINEMA 8 DOLBY PRO LOGIC II MUSIC O x x x x x x x x O DOLBY PRO LOGIC II GAME O x PRO LOGIC O O O x x x x x xX x x DOLBY HEADPHONE 4 MULTI CHI ULTI CH IN x x x x x x x x x x x x e e ULTI IN PLIIx CINEMA O x O x ULTI IN MUSIC EI
8. e 44 fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse fast reverse py EU E Kee We fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward fast forward ENTER Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause _ A v lt gt L Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop SETUP RETURN SOURCE ON Power on Power on _ _ Power on _ _ 2 i SEARCH O SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off E CH Buttons S SHUFFLE guyey MENU Menu guide Menu guide Menu guide Menu i CH _ 0 9 10 NZ lt gt Cursor Cursor Cursor 8 REPEAT wp P ENTER Enter setting Enter setting x Enter setting Enter forward i screen Browse SETUP SEARCH Set up Set up _ _ Setup _ Remote mode 1 switching Press and hold RETURN Return Return Cancel Return CH SHUFFLE 5 Switch channels shuffle play REPEAT E Switch channels repeat play 0 9 10 Select track Select track Select track Select track _ _ _ Special Remarks 0 D D 0 Special Remarks D Only one component can be preset for each mode If a new code is preset the previous code is automatically cleared 2 The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand Check beforehand Preset a DVD player
9. MODE SELECTOR RC SETUP Depending the model year of manufacture of your equipment some buttons may not operate The device mode DEV1 DEv2 cannot be changed while the setting is being made 64 Operating DENON Audio Components 1 Press MODE SELECTOR for the component to be operated The indicator for the component to be operated flashes C AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 iPod SYSTEM CALL iPod em TUNER FM AM G DVD player recorder Z pvp QD player recorder Nu E ONUS ES VCR TAPE PTY DIGITAL TUNER VCR E Satellite Receiver Cable TV TTN X The mode switches each time AMP is pressed AMP mode ZONE2 mode ZONE3 mode 2 Operate the component X For details refer to the component s operating instructions HOME is used to return to the AMP mode AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL when in any mode other than AMP Presetting The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate devices of various brands 1 Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to preset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press NUMBER and input the 5 digit number of the
10. SAT 2 DVR 1 ue ZONE2 Lx s O O 1 seva lt n mm SS AU 1 11 1 W x 2 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 202481 3 DVR 2 4NCR ZONE4 ZONE MONITOR 1 2 2 OPTICAL ER 2 z L MONTOR 2 2 i 8 O Weu 25125 v L L D 000000000 component video may be indicated differently your monitor details see the monitor s operating instructions The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals e Connect an HDP High Definition Player in the same way e When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVD Assign Digital IG page 42 When using a BNC cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVD Assign Component I 42 13 T ble MM id Connect the cables to be used Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod ASD 1R sold separately to urntable cartridge connect the iPod to the AVC A1HD For instructions on the Control CD player Nm AUDIO Dock for iPod settings refer
11. Selectable items OSD Set ZONE2 monitor as onscreen display Zone Amp Assign Change the assignment for the power amps Selectable items ZONE2 ZONE2 ZONE3 Display ZONE2 and ZONES operations When connected to the component video output connectors the on screen display is not displayed e On screen display appears only the ZONE2 monitor It does not appear on the ZONES monitor Display only ZONE2 operations Option Setup Make various other settings Menu tree Manual Setup Option Setup AmpAssign Volume Control Source Delete EW Quick Select Name O Trigger Out 1 Trigger Out 2 The places where the surround amplifier and surround back amplifier are used can be set freely according to the usage environment This makes it possible to output sound to rooms other than the room the MAIN ZONE where surround playback is performed multi zone playback or play the sound with high quality using the front speakers bi wiring bi amp connections Selectable items 20 ZONE3 ZONE MONO Bi Wiring amp 20 2 Bi amp ZONE3 Bi amp ZONE MONO Bi Amp ZONE2 ZONE3 20 2 3 0 0 2CH Bi Wiring 2 Bi Amp Free Assign For details see Amp Assign Multi Zone Connections and Operations I page 73 76 E Volume Control Set the MAIN ZONE volume setting Volume Limit Make a setting for
12. VIKTIGT APPARATEN INTE MODIFIERAS Under f ruts ttning att apparaten installeras enligt anvisningarna i denna bruksanvisning uppfyller denna kraven i R amp TTE direktivet Ev modifiering av apparaten kan resultera i farlig radio och elektromagnetisk str lning F RSIKTIGT e Se till att det finns ett avst nd p minst 20 cm mellan apparatens antenn och personer i omgivningen e Apparaten och dess antenn f r inte placeras eller anv ndas i n rheten av andra antenner eller s ndare Getting Started Accessories n n n n eee 3 Cautions on Handling 33 Cautions MO About the Remote Control eR Inserting n nn 2 3 4 Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit 4 Part Names and Functions sett 44 5 Display 0000000000000000000005000000000000000000001000000050000000006500 5 Rear Pamela sas 2 2 20 0 0 1127 6 Remote Control Mit 22222022 5 222203 Fi Connections Preparations 2 nn 8 ablesilijsecifori ommeetuens 8 Vdeo Convers 0 10012527 2 2 1211 1 n eee 9 Speaker Installation n n 55 n um 10 Speaker Layout Speaker Connections Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors 12 Connecting the Connecting the Playback Components DVD Player Record Player cD Player EE ASSEN TV CA
13. Information Signal Information Monitor1 Monitor2 El Signal Information The HDMI input output signal information is displayed Items to be checked Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth Monitor1 The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed Monitor2 The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed Items to be checked Interface Supported resol Auto Surround Mode Shows information about auto surround mode settings The surround mode for which the last memory function was used for the different input signal types is displayed Menu tree ei D AUTO Auto Surround Mode Items to be checked Analog PCM 2ch Digital2ch Digital 5 1ch Multi ch Quick Select Shows information about Quick Select settings Menu tree Quick Select 1 Quick Select 2 Quick Select 3 Items to be checked Select Source Input Mode EQ Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level I For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3 see page 63 Preset Station Shows information about preset stations Menu tree Preset Station NET USB Input source Items to be checked 1 G8 When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed the set s status can be checked on the display 51 p ue1s Bunjer suon uuoo xoeqAeld euoz n niN 033002 uoneuuoju
14. 50 2 2 22 OS cree ZONE S RUE 50 Setem Function e E no Audio Input Signal n Punch Through Function HDMIInformation 51 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays ai aaa 69 D Signal u gt ss 51 Adjusting the Backlight s Brightness 5575 69 Monitori 51 Resetting the Remote Control Unit 69 Monitor 51 Sub Remote Control Unit Operations E 70 71 Auto Surround Mode EBI EE EE EE 7702 COLT Ee 51 Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used Preset 51 ZONE Moe ee ee ee 12 Setting the Remote ID Playback Resetting the Settings Preparations ZE EE 52 Turning the Power On 52 Amp Assign Multi Zone Connections and Operations Operations During Playback 052 Multi Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function 73 76 Playing Video and Audio Equipment 52 Mu lti Zone Connections 22222122 22220212 202 227 77 Basic Operation EE 52 Multi Zone Operations dE EE 78 iPod Playback Turning the Power OI ere eee es erce sr 78 Basic Operation Selecting the Input Source Listening dl 53 54 Adjusting The ON Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the od 54 Turning off the Sound Temporarily M 78 Playing Network Audio USB Memory EE 54 55 Other 79 93 Basic Operation Listening n 57 Troubleshooting EEN 94
15. Selectable items ON OFF Lch Level Adjust the left channel output level 1248 098 12dB Variable range The Lch Level and Rch Level can be set when Channel is set to Stereo 35 2 suo 04300 a Rch Level Adjust the right channel output level 12dB 0dB 12dB Variable range Channel Switch between stereo and mono output Selectable items Stereo Mono When GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Amp Assign is set to ZONE MONO Bi amp ZONE or ZONE2 3 the Channel setting is automatically set to Mono Volume Level Adjust the main volume level Selectable items Variable 40dB 048 Variable is set when a power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 ZONES output channel at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Amp Assign Volume Limit Make a setting for maximum volume Selectable items 20dB 10dB 04 This can be set when Volume Level is set Variable Power On Level Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on dB 70dB 18dB Selectable items Last This can be set when Volume Level is set Variable Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on Full 40dB 2048
16. UXE e 2 DVR 2 11 ZONE 2 SPEAKER IMPEDANCE FRONT CENTER SURR BACK AMP ASSIGN AMP ASSIGN 2 6 160 SURROUND A Ei B 6 16Q 8 160 560005 230V 50Hz Mo OOOO OO SPEAKERS ES ASSIGNI2 EE Smee ee een Deena mse eee AC OUTLET AC 230V 50Hz SWITCHED 100W 0 43A 3 9 Speaker terminals SPEAKERS 10 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors 13 o Digital audio connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL BNC 13 21 D HDMI connectors 12 B ETHERNET connector 20 D USB port 19 B WLAN ANTENNA rerminal 20 D DENON LINK connector 18 TRIGGER OUT jacks 22 REMOTE CONTROL 21 D DOCK CONTROL jack 14 SIGNAL GND terminal ee 14 D VIDEO S VIDEO connectors 13 Remote Control Unit Main remote control unit RC 1067 T d 2 d I ei NEE s 1067 9 Signal transmission indicator 64 Mode select buttons e 64 Quick select System call buttons 63 68 Surround mode buttons 44 46 System buttons A 65 66 Q Audio delay button DL 50 Tun
17. Menus with Illustrations Auto Setup STEPI Speaker Detection Please place the microphone at ear height at main listening position Config 9 1 SW 15 Amp Assign Operation button guidance Guidance text for item at cursor position LJ Icon Switch the selected item m 4 4 Switch to the next item Selected item Switch the selected item Selected item Assign 4 lt Switch to the next item Video Input Mode Rename LI List XX Switch the selected item using AV Operations The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit Press the MENU button The GUI menu is displayed To operate from the main remote control unit be sure to set the remote control unit to the AMP mode Press the V gt button to select the menu to be set or operated X To return to the previous item press the lt or RETURN button 3 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting 4 Press the MENU button to finish 23 m Bunjer suon uuoo 1013009 Information I page 50 51 T Status MAIN ZONE ZONE2 3 4 Audio Input Signal 9 HDMI Information Auto Surround Mode Quick Select Preset Station Parameter I page 46 50 eocoosecccecee
18. PRESETCODE 3 Satstation 01083 T Tantec 00455 V Variosat 00173 01377 00392 00639 01142 SKY Italia 01848 Schaub Lorenz 01214 arbs 01225 Ventana 00200 01 070 00093 01498 01448 Sky XL 01412 Schneider 00710 01206 01251 Tatung 00455 Vestel 01251 Dish Network System 01505 00775 Skymaster 01075 Bon GE ds Boston 01659 VH Sat 00299 Dishpro 01505 00775 Skyplus 01412 MIZ0MS leac 01225 01227 01251 01322 Viasat 01682 DMT 01075 Sony 00639 01640 SCS 00299 lecatel 01200 ViewSat 01232 Dream Multimedia 01237 Star Choice 00869 Sedea Electronique 00125 01206 01283 01626 echniSat So 00155 00808 01081 Visionic 00125 01283 E Echostar 01505 00775 00610 Strong 01300 SEG 01075 01087 01251 01626 STE VisionNet 01557 Expressvu 00775 Sunny 01300 echnomate 01283 01610 00142 00710 00713 01413 e Seleco 00871 Geer 01672 Visiosat 713 01413 Foxtel 01356 T TechniSat 01195 01197 Thomson 01175 01534 01662 Septimo 01375 echnotrend 01429 Viva 00856 G GbSAT 01214 215 01412 Techwood 01284 01626 Vivid 01162 Gecco 01412 gem geg erino 00610 Glob 01412 u ele System 01251 01409 01611 01801 Voom 00869 Servimat 01611 Electronic VTech 00818 01159 Xtreme 01300 eleciel 01043 ServiSat 3 01251 mm TES Wavelength 01232 01413 Hirschmann 01412 7 Zehnder 01075 01412 01
19. 0499 0092 0264 0418 0150 Tiny TMK TML TNCi Tobishi Tobo Tocom Tokai Tokaido Tokyo Tomashi Tongguang Tongtel Topline Toshiba Totevision Towada Toyoda Toyomenka Trakton Trans Continens TRANS continents Transonic Triad Trident Trio Tristar Triumph Truetone Tuntex TVS TVTEXT 95 U Uher Ultra Ultravox Unic Line United Universal Universum 10093 11269 10236 11756 10017 10218 10748 10156 10009 10374 11037 10035 10218 10264 10587 10668 10154 11265 10166 11164 11656 10845 10618 10195 10035 10051 10217 10009 10178 10217 10037 10556 10009 10455 10712 10218 10217 11498 10218 0037 0250 0030 0463 0556 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10092 1 1 1 1 10009 0037 0480 0037 0037 0037 1037 10047 11163 10618 10370 10327 10195 10070 10817 10180 10009 10037 10668 0780 1037 0764 0865 0512 0780 0556 0764 0346 0051 0486 0455 1982 0037 1256 0060 1037 1356 1704 0821 0508 0109 0011 0264 0217 0037 0092 0370 0163 0587 1037 0512 0362 0264 0170 0037 10178 10264 10163 11037 0009 0371 10264 10587 10556 10009 10374 10156 11145 11156 11508 11945 10718 10264 10070 10374 10714
20. For the audio output use high quality pin plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced e For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices refer to the respective devices operating instructions To conduct multi zone playback see Amp Assign Multi Zone Connections and Operations IS page 73 78 ZONE2 or 2 4 Optical Connections The AVC A1HD is equipped with Optical output connectors for ZONE2 and ZONEA If a bit stream amp is rigged up these zones can also be used to enjoy home theater AV amplifier ZONE2 AUDIO OPTICAL IN AV amplifier ZONE4 AUDIO OPTICAL IN Infrared retransmitter Infrared sensor Extension jack for future use 1 1 22 22112 S SAD 4 CD 1 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 2 DVR 1 3 0 4VCRIZONE4 ZONE 2 r e Connect the monitor ZONE2 the same the ZONE2 or Pre out Connectors IG See left column f the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog change to PCM 2 channel signal and output it from ZONE2 optical output connectors 21 bal 5 5
21. e 3 1 channel playback ZONE2 stereo playback ZONES stereo playback ai Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker e 3 1 channel playback ZONE2 monaural playback monaural playback terminals Switching ZONE2 ON OFF button ZONE3 ON OFF button Ces S peaker termina SURR AMP AMP MAIN ZONE MAIN ZONE Amp Assign FRONT CENTER SURR A pack SURRB Assien ASSIGN 2 ZONE2 ZONE3 mode H L H L H L H R L R A A A ZONE2 Amp Assign mode KEN Stereo Stereo 7ONE3 FL FL FL FL FR ON ZONE2 3 MONO E En SLA sLA SLA sLA SLA salsa SR A SR A SR A SR A SR A 5 58 zi SL B SL B SL B SL B SL B SL B SL B Free Assign SR B SR B SR B SR B SR B SR B SR B e When the ZONE2 ON OFF button is set to ON and the ZONE3 ON OFF button is set to OFF the MAIN SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL ZONE is set to 5 1 channel playback BR SBR SBR 58 58 SBR SBR e When the ZONE3 ON OFF button is set to ON the MAIN ZONE is set to 3 1 channel playback 721 221 Z2L 221 221 Z2L 72 a Amp Assign mode
22. Source Select 7 40 44 j 2 DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX CD TUNER e Play iPod e Playback Mode iPod Assign Video Video Select Video Convert Excluding CD and TUNER Scaler Resolution Progressive Mode Excluding CD and TUNER Aspect Excluding CD and TUNER Input Mode Rename Source Level QNET USB Play Playback Mode Still Picture Video Video Select Scaler Resolution Input Mode Rename Source Level PHONO Video Video Select Scaler Resolution Input Mode Rename Source Level euoz n niN uoneunoju 2 Audio Surround Parameters Surround Mode Auto Setup CS page 25 27 Hac E K page 44 46 3 Auto Setup O Option 9 Parameter Check Cinema EQ STEREO STEP1 Speaker Detection Room Speaker Configuration Check 9 DIRECT STEP2 Measurement Direct Mode Distance Check D COMP STANDARD STEP3 Calculation Mic Select Channel Level Check LFE DOLBY HEADPHONE STEP4 Check Crossover Check Center Image e When using headphones STEP5 Store EQ Check Panorama DOLBY PLIIx DOLBY or Restore Dimension DOLBY PL Center Width Delay Time a DTS NEO 6 Effect HOME THX CINEMA e Manual Setup 27 page 28 40
23. Delay Time Adjust delay time to control sound stage size Variable range 0 5 300ms Effect Switch effect signal for multi surround speakers on and off OFF Selectable items ON Effect Level Adjust effect signal level Variable range 1 10 15 Set to lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural Room Size Determine size of acoustic environment Selectable items Small Medium small Medium Room Size does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played Mediumlarge Large 47 m ones AFDM Auto select surround mode by source This function only works for software containing a special identification signal If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES it is played in 6 1 channels If not it is played in 5 1 channels Selectable items OFF Example Playing Dolby Digital software with EX flag e When is set the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY D PLIIx C mode To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode set AFDM to OFF and SB CH Out to MTRX Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when AFDM is set to ON set SB CH Out to MTRX ON or PLIIx CINEMA SB CH Out for Multi channel sources S
24. Flow of video signals for ZONE3 ZONE3 High picture ZONE3 quality playback E monitor S Video connector Sa Video connector Video connector Video inputs Video outputs d e When not using this function connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video input connector The resolution of the HDMI input compatible monitor connected to the AVC A1HD can be checked at GUI menu Information HDMI Information Monitor1 or Monitor2 287 page 51 For optimum video performance THX recommends that you set the conversion mode to OFF to use video signals pass through system without up conversion Example View video input from a component video on the component video monitor HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video connectors 480p 576p 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S Video or Video format When using the component video output connectors for connection to the ZONE2 monitor the ZONE2 s on screen display is not displayed When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate bal 5 5 eh 9 5 o O G a Speaker Installation Speaker Layout The illustration
25. Omni Onix Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orbit Orion Oritron Ormond P amp B Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panasonic Panda peeKTon Philco Philips 31521 30521 30713 31403 30770 31451 30665 30843 30730 31730 30651 30751 31223 30831 30741 30770 31004 31367 31367 30741 30869 31404 31271 30717 30665 30770 30831 31197 31402 31923 31051 31202 32024 30872 31923 30774 30831 30752 31923 30843 31228 30752 30672 30690 30833 30838 30862 31104 31832 30838 30503 30627 31158 31224 30843 30525 30571 30872 30695 31233 31695 30651 30713 31451 30695 30713 30759 30768 30790 30831 30831 30695 30713 31906 31920 30672 30852 31056 31321 30503 30490 30571 30703 31362 31462 31490 31579 31762 31834 31905 31908 30717 30789 31203 30898 31224 30690 30862 30503 30539 30646 30675 30854 30885 31158 31260 31267 31340 31354 Philo Phonotrend PianoDisc Pioneer Plu2 Pointer Polaroid Polk Audio Portland Powerpoint Presidian Prima Prinz Prism Pro2 ProCaster Proceed Proline Proscan Proson Prosonic ProVision Pye QONIX Qwestar Radionette RadioShack Raite RCA Realistic REC Redstar Relisys Reoc Revoy Rex Richmond Rio Roadstar Rocksonic Ronin Rotel Rowa Rownsonic Saba Sabaki Saivod 31345 30699 31024 30490 30525 30571 30631 31965 30
26. apparaten T nk p milj aspekterna n r du bortskaffar batterier Apparaten far inte uts ttas f r v tska e Placera inte f rem l fyllda med v tska t ex vaser p apparaten der Entsorgung der Batterien die rtlich geltenden A NOTE ABOUT This product s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused Please dispose of any materials in accordance with the local recycling regulations When discarding the unit comply with local rules or regulations Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with the local regulations concerning battery disposal This product and the supplied accessories excluding the batteries constitute the applicable product according to the WEEE directive HINWEIS ZUM RECYCLING Das Verpackungsmaterial dieses Produktes ist zum Recyceln geeignet und kann wieder verwendet werden Bitte entsorgen Sie alle Materialien entsprechend der rtlichen Recycling Vorschriften Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung des Ger tes die rtlichen Vorschriften und Bestimmungen Die Batterien d rfen nicht in den Hausm ll geworfen oder verbrannt werden bitte entsorgen Sie die Batterien gem der rtlichen Vorschriften Dieses Produkt und das im Lieferumfang enthaltene Zubeh r mit Ausnahme der Batterien entsprechen der WEEE Direktive UNE REMARQUE CONCERNANT LE RECYCLAGE Les mat riaux d emballage de ce produit sont recycla
27. 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 5 x x x E x x x x x x E VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Q x x S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO z Q x Q S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO 3 1080 480 720 1 4801 5761 1 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT e N With HDMI 1080 COMPONENT VIDEO 1 55 VIDEO 1 55 VIDEO VIDEO 8 o monitor 480 720 1 VIDEO COMPONENT x VIDEO Q 480i 576i 1 1 1 1080 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO z 480p 720p 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO 4801 5761 1 1 1 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT 1080 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 MI COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO N o 480p 720p Q COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO S VIDEO S O O 480i 576i O 1 1 1 MI
28. 10668 10480 10361 10217 10109 10036 0668 11037 10418 10698 10217 10150 10145 11163 11556 11971 10650 10217 10036 10418 10715 10631 10418 10346 10200 10074 10011 Univox V V2max V7 Videoseven Vector Research Vestel Vexa Victor Videocon Videologic Videologique Videomac VideoSystem Videotechnic Videoton Vidikron Vidtech Viewpia Viewsonic Viking Viore Vision Vizio Vortec Voxson Waltham Wards Warumaia Watson Watt Radio Waycon Wega Wegavox Weipai Welltech Weltblick Welton Weltstar Westinghouse Wharfedale White Westinghouse Windsor Windy Sam Wintel World 0037 10864 0865 10880 0030 10037 1163 0008 10250 0653 0508 10218 0217 10009 0037 10717 0163 10054 0178 10876 0857 1578 10060 1207 10037 0864 1758 10037 0178 0037 10443 0047 0000 0236 0030 1147 0037 10374 0009 0394 10163 0156 10036 0009 10009 0714 10217 0178 11037 0000 1282 10037 0451 0623 10668 0556 10714 0451 10163 10885 11217 10217 10037 10053 10218 10374 10036 0864 1627 10217 0885 0037 10109 10668 0054 0156 0180 0166 0866 10035 10661 0037 0668 10037 0451 11577 10556 0236 10889 11037 10236 11755 11755 10668 100
29. 10000 10009 10054 10455 10217 10037 10447 10009 1137 10335 10218 11982 10093 10009 10009 10178 10218 10748 10871 10880 10047 10051 10092 11271 10000 11904 10000 10178 11144 10178 10009 10109 10093 10092 10217 10054 10051 10011 11191 11556 10706 10714 10154 11755 10712 10455 10170 10009 10037 11163 10455 10037 10264 0872 1504 1944 0650 1756 0808 0864 0208 0037 0009 0287 0587 0054 0178 0036 1904 0180 0451 0092 1240 0092 0374 0361 0163 0036 0154 0060 0009 1248 0698 0178 1149 0698 0418 0037 0037 0668 10487 11944 0374 0335 1944 0036 1331 10009 10817 0367 10009 11163 0455 10218 10865 10154 10030 10037 10178 10093 10217 10163 10000 0037 10217 1254 11027 10171 11037 10668 10264 0163 10610 10371 10805 10556 10870 10000 10171 10876 10171 10060 10218 10170 10156 10036 11156 11371 11537 10706 10714 10512 10217 10217 echnics echniSat echnisson echnosonic echnovox echview echwood ecnimagen ledelex eiron eknika D e System ectronic eavia E co Ee ecolor lelecor efunken efusion egazi e
30. 10178 10060 10335 10773 1003 10163 1003 10880 10037 10180 10668 10487 10000 10037 10813 10218 10009 10037 10037 11952 10156 10092 10773 10009 10156 11498 10171 10154 10009 10180 10009 10009 10374 10009 10236 10163 10218 10163 11982 10009 N N 10748 10698 10865 10865 10208 10009 10163 10009 10017 10150 10037 11505 10218 10180 10037 10030 10092 10009 10880 11298 10011 10009 10037 10371 10433 11537 10163 10361 10880 11504 10037 10264 10805 10817 11115 10163 10361 10548 0374 0178 0178 0171 0037 1037 0218 0180 0764 0764 0037 0217 0037 0208 0037 0154 0053 0074 11651 0418 0051 0036 0370 0217 10264 0361 10548 0370 11100 10000 10011 10036 10353 10650 11751 11904 0715 0060 10178 0226 10217 10218 10009 10037 10264 Strong Studio Experience Stylandia Sunkai Sunstar Sunwatt Sunwood Superla Superscan Supersonic SuperTech Supra Supreme Susumu Sutron 5 2000 SVA Svasa Swisstec Sydney Sylvania Symphonic Synco Syntax Sysline Tacico Tai Yi Taishan Tandberg Tandy Targa Tashiko atung 1 TCM Teac Tec Tech Line Techica Technica 11149 10843 10217 10218 10865 10009 10455 10037 10217
31. 1037 0668 0587 0487 0343 0217 0011 0370 0218 0648 0217 0706 0070 0487 0683 0180 1163 0180 0808 0706 1034 0698 0008 0773 0009 0037 0093 0009 0053 0163 0714 0036 0208 0548 0009 0374 0714 1037 0264 097 0880 10661 0560 10480 0335 10037 0009 1163 0560 1191 1371 0195 1017 0817 10264 11904 11196 10037 10037 10217 10218 10264 10418 1 1 1 0017 0865 0451 0037 0361 0037 10217 0037 0455 0715 0009 0163 0556 0037 10180 10178 10037 10394 10661 10037 10180 10170 0178 0030 0217 0499 0865 10060 11269 10487 11900 10808 10634 10556 10374 10264 10036 10371 10108 10226 10163 10610 10865 10036 10195 10587 10508 10361 10556 0714 10808 10178 11163 10714 10625 10499 10371 10218 10035 10487 10163 10343 10218 10668 10880 10037 10443 10672 10587 Hema Hewlett Packard Hifivox Highline Hikona Hikone Hinari Hisawa Hisense Hitachi Hitachi Fujian Hitec Hitsu Hoeher Home Electronics Hongmei Hongyan Hornyphon Hoshai HP Hua Tun Huafa Huanghaimei Huanghe Huanglong Huangshan Huanyu Huaqiang Huari Hugoson Huodateji Hygashi Hypersonic
32. 42 Connect the cables to be used DBS BS tuner VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COAXIAL AUDIO OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT YEE FR Gen 20 Ge e Pa i x ez Le 1 NS A When using an optical cable cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select SAT Assign Digital I gt 42 When using a BNC cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select SAT Assign Component I page 42 15 bal 5 E o eh 9 5 Connecting the Recording Components Carefully check the left L and right R channels and the inputs and outputs and be sure to interconnect correctly Digital Video Recorder 2 S Connect the cables to used E a Digital video recorder VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI OPTICAL AUDIO 5 VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OU
33. Bunoousa qnojj Di E c 1 SOURCE SELECT PHONES MASTER VOLUME jet lt ON STANDBY gt POWER ENTER AV lt D amp g iPod BEv1 mode lt lt lt gt l i lt lt gt gt gt m POWER ON POWER OFF POWER OFF 1 2 e2 ENTER ANM db eer VOLUME MUSEI gt F CHANNEL lt SELECT ri AMP mode Main remote control unit P REPEAT Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Playback Preparations Turning the Power On Press POWER The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode Press lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER ON The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on To operate the AVC A1HD using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the AMP mode 64 Remote Control Unit Operations Turning the Power Off CDPress lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER OFF The power is set to the standby mode Press POWER The power indicator turns off and so does the power Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the power is in the standby mode When leaving h
34. COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT O x x x x gt 4 4 SA VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 x S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 Q x S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 x S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 1080 x x COMPONENT x x x 4 4 4 Without HDMI O 480p 720p 1 x x x COMPONENT 3 x monitor 4801 5761 1 1 1 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 1080 VIDEO 1 55 VIDEO 1 55 VIDEOS VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 3 with HDMI O JO 480p 720p COMPONENT 1 x VIDEO X COMPONENT 3 VIDEO 2 Q O 480i 576i 1 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 monitor t 1080p x x COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 x S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 8 480p 720p x x COMPONENT 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO x COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO 4801 5761 1 1 1 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 3 1080 x COMPONENT S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 X S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 5 480 720 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO x COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO 480576 1 1 COMPONENT 1
35. Copyright protection system In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD Video or DVD Audio disc using HDMI DVI connections both the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection system called HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP 15 copy protection technology consisting of data encoding and mutual identification of the devices The AVC A1HD is HDCP compatible For details on the DVD player or monitor you are using refer to its operating instructions When connecting with an HDMII DVI converter cable adapter HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the format When connecting to a monitor etc equipped with a DVI D connector connection is possible using an HDMI DVI converter cable but depending on the combination of components in some cases the video signals will not be output When connecting using an HDMI DVI converter adapter the video signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with the connected cable etc Use a CPPM compatible DVD player to play DVD Audio discs that are copyright protected by CPPM The audio signals output from the HDMI connector sampling frequency bit rate etc may be restricted by the connected device Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are not HDCP compatible Video signals are not output if the input video signals d
36. Fader second release the two buttons Use to adjust the volume of the speakers P front gt rear If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second start over from step 1 Personal Memory Plus Function This function sets the settings input mode surround mode HDMI output mode Picture Adjust Audio Delay etc last selected I he fader function does not affect the subwoofer The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is 12 dB for the individual input sources When you switch to an input source the settings are automatically set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was used The surround parameters tone control room settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes 63 2 E 2 5 Remote Control Unit Operations Main Remote Control Unit On the main remote control unit the display switches according to the device being operated and the mode In modes other than iPod the mode switches between DEV4 bEv2 each time the MODE SELECTOR is pressed In the AMP NET DTU DEv1 and iPod modes when the remote ID is set the AVC A1HD can be used independently even in an environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers Signal transmission indicator AMP 8
37. HOME THX CINEMA QUICK SELECT E POWER CH SELECT AV lt D QUICK SELECT ap ge AV E C CH SELECT About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 62 Operations Connect the HDMI to the AVC A1HD with equipment compatible with the HDMI control function Put the power on for all the equipment connected to the HDMI Check the settings for all the equipment connected to the HDMI and make HDMI available to them X Please consult the operating instructions for the connected equipment to check the settings Operations 1 3 do not have to be repeated once started Carryout Operations 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be plugged out Switch the television input to the HDMI connected to the AVC A1HD Switch the AVC A1HD input to the HDMI input source and check if the picture from the player is ok Put the television power on standby and check if the goes into standby If the AVC A1HD does not work please check the following Is the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup HDMI Control Control iz amp page 31 set to ON s the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup HDMI Control Control Monitor 31 set for the monitor output connected to television s the GUI menu Manual Setup H
38. Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid Check that the following parts are supplied with the product properly RC 1067 dd PR If this happens let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power 1067 CD Owner s manual 1 urned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature 2 2 5 2 CD ROM Owner s manual before using the unit 3 Service station et e Cautions on using mobile phones 4 Power cord Cord length Approx 1 5 444 Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise If so move 5 Main remote control 1067 1 he mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use 227 6 LR6 AA batteries for 1067 44444444 2 7 Sub remote control RC 1070 batteries for RC 1070 Moving the unit E Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power 2 8 4 outlet 2 Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks inthe E amenna i E Next disconnect connection cables to other system units before battery compartment etup microphone Cord length Approx 76 m e Note that the illustrations in these instructions may from the actual unit for explanation purposes Cautions on Installation Note For proper heat dispersal do not install this unit a confined
39. S VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT O VIDEO O O x O COMPONENT O S VIDEO O S VIDEO O O O O COMPONENT O S VIDEO O S VIDEO Signal present Output present X No signal X No output On screen display not displayed 92 Relationship Between Amp Assign Setting and Speaker Output STEREO or DIRECT 2ch Mode Status Speaker terminal Satung Surround mode SURROUNDA SURROUND BACK B ASSIGN 2 STEREO DIRECT E FL FR FLFR 5 26h Bi Wiring Other SLA SRA SBL SBR u STEREO DIRECT FUFR FUFR 2ch Bi Amp Other SLA SRA SBL SBR u Multi Zone Power On Off Status Speaker terminal Setting SURROUND SURROUND B ZONE2 ZONE3 SURROUNDA Ger Geo ASSIGN 2 on ON SLA SRA SLB SRB 7218 Jont OFF SLA SRA SLB SRB ZUR ag ON SLA SRA SBL SBR SLB SRB OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR SLB SRB on LON SLA SRA SLB SRB ZUR on OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR SLB SRB on 1 0 SLA SRA SLB SRB 7318 OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR SLB SRB on LON SLA SRA SLB SRB 72773 ZONE OFF SLA SRA SLB SRB 72 MONO og ON SLA SRA SLB SRB 73 OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR SLB SRB L ON SLA SRA FUFR UR OFF SLA SRA m FL FR 72 DER re SLA SRA SBL SBR FL FR OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR FL FR on
40. Setting 4 Making bi wiring connections for the FL and FR channels in the MAIN ZONE and conducting 9 1 channel playback switching with other modes not possible Switching Surround Mode switching channel playback switching with other modes not possible MAIN ZONE MAIN ZONE Amp Assign mode MAIN ZONE Ej MAIN ZONE For 2 channel bi amp playback 7160 FL FR v i Amp M al Si v Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL FL FR Surround Mode e DIRECT STEREO gt Multi Channel Surround 2ch Bi Amp Amp Assign mode Amp Assign mode gt Bi Amp 2 gt Bi Wiring bi wiring playback 200 2ch Bi Wiring Both and B can be installed for SR and SL 4 Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker Speak inal terminals supra SURR SURR B AMP ASSIGN CENTER BACK AMP ASSIGN 2 Speaker terminal FRONT surra SUPP SURR B AMP ASSIGN BACK AMP ASSIGN 2 E Amp Assign mode R L R L R L R L R L N gt E Normal FR FL C SRA SL A SBL Amp Assign mod R L R L R L bi L R L FR FL
41. lt lt gt gt m 68 System Call Function This function lets you register a series of operations at a single button For example the amplifier can be turned on the input source selected the monitor s power turned on the source device s power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button Up to 32 signals each can be registered at SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 Registering Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to register Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 8 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system call registration mode is set 4 Press SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 at which you want to register the signals Press the buttons you want to register in the same sequence as the operations you want to perform The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed Example Press POWER ON Press MODE SELECTOR DVD 1 Press gt 3 The mode can be switched by pressing MODE SELECTOR X Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to register Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed Calling 1 Press to select SYSTEM CALL 2 Press SYSTEM 1 2 or 3 at which the signals were
42. 0017 0060 1937 0668 0047 0030 0455 0109 0009 0009 11371 10163 10370 1498 10853 10860 0370 1756 0787 0037 0217 0886 10001 10070 10480 10715 10037 10374 10808 0054 10208 10218 0037 10163 10217 0217 10809 0180 1271 10264 10163 0047 10451 0178 11917 0560 10163 0163 10037 10865 10000 10054 10715 10361 10073 10163 10683 11904 10817 0208 10556 1037 0154 0217 0264 0370 10217 0352 11163 0171 0217 10631 11556 0217 0668 0000 0361 0455 0499 0264 0683 1298 0264 10218 10374 11454 10000 10093 10180 10030 10092 11347 11147 10335 10035 10217 10361 10374 10163 10218 10880 11217 10030 10154 10178 10714 10606 10217 10163 10037 10036 Gooding Goodmans Gorenje GPM Gradiente Graetz Gran Prix Granada Grandin Gronic Grundig Grundy Grunkel Grunpy H amp B Haaz Haier Haihong Haiyan Halifax Hallmark Hampton Hanimex Hankook Hanseatic Hantarex Hantor Harley Davidson Harman Kardon Harsper Harvard Harwa Harwood Hauppauge Havermy HCM Heathkit Helios Hello Kitty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0487 0000
43. 10030 11704 10817 10704 10508 10499 10264 10217 10011 10009 10327 10370 10371 11371 10218 10556 10217 10343 10092 10009 10036 10037 10218 10764 10092 10092 Nishi obliko Nogamatic Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Normerel Novatronic Oceanic Odeon Okano Olevia Omega Omni Onida Onimax Onwa Opera Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orcom Orion Orline Ormond Osaki Osio 080 Otic Otto Versand Pace Pacific Palladium Palsonic Panama Panashiba 10 030 10070 10 10 109 10163 10374 10610 748 10217 10 10 037 343 10037 10 037 10092 10 455 10000 10 163 10264 10 11 10 10 009 144 264 10748 053 10714 10 10 180 602 10037 10 10 10 154 150 650 10887 10 093 10037 11 10017 10178 10264 10880 10037 10668 10037 10374 504 10037 10218 10036 11 10093 10195 10361 10 11 10 10 10 498 092 10037 037 037 327 714 10001 10264 10778 10 009 10001 0208 0480 0631 0824 0109 0560 0374 0698 0208 0037 1240 0698 1253 0218 0250 0178 0236 1463 1 0443 1196 0218 1037 0217 0556 0037 0036 0217 0512 0443 1137 0163 0370 1137 0037 0418 1
44. 10073 0047 10217 0668 10037 10037 0486 10030 10556 10374 10208 0051 10037 10195 10512 10217 10154 10030 10037 0648 10047 10051 0092 11922 11247 10625 10154 10030 10418 10361 10556 10226 10009 10070 10200 10668 10556 11037 10180 10037 10264 10668 1454 0093 1958 1917 1147 10560 0180 0346 0877 11922 10764 1037 10009 11037 10264 10035 10074 10327 11037 1904 1037 0090 10634 0371 0264 0150 0370 0054 0178 1953 1547 1047 0150 0361 1207 Remotec Reoc Revox Rex RFT Rinex Roadstar Rolson Rover Rowa Royal Lux Runco Ruyi Saba Sagem Saige Saisho Saivod Sakai Sakyno Salora Salsa Sampo Samsung Sandra Sanjian Sanky Sansui Santon Sanyo Sanyong Sanyuan Saville 10250 10037 10714 10037 10163 10037 10773 10009 10418 1900 1371 0817 0264 0163 0455 0335 11756 10047 10156 10702 10814 10587 11249 10556 10264 10163 10035 10217 10264 10060 10463 10037 10714 11904 10009 10047 10156 10171 10508 10208 10088 10009 10037 10093 10060 0036 0748 0587 0335 0017 0250 0335 0548 0455 0009 0009 0037 1163 0163 0548 0047 0030 10036
45. 10367 10388 10668 10746 0030 10218 Minato Minerva Minoka Mirror Mitsubishi Mivar Monaco Monivision Morgan s Motorola MTC MTlogic Mudan Multitec Multitech Murphy Musikland Mx Onda Myryad NAD Naiko Nakimura Nanbao Nansheng Narita NAT National NEC eckermann eovia Netsat etTV Neufunk ew Tech New World ewave Nikkai Nikkei Nikko Nikkodo 0037 10070 0037 11900 0154 0180 0030 0817 0108 10217 0009 10700 0037 10054 0180 0011 10714 0051 0264 0037 11556 0180 0264 10163 0218 11498 0556 0156 10361 0037 10037 0009 10764 1982 10226 0051 0047 10053 11270 0661 10455 0170 0037 0418 0037 0865 0037 1755 10009 0610 0009 0556 0218 0093 10009 0163 0714 0178 0178 10556 10843 10817 10178 10866 10606 10374 10264 10817 10208 0556 10714 10108 0250 1250 1917 0556 10037 10051 0060 10370 0009 10486 0009 10370 10154 10178 11170 10653 10374 10036 0200 10163 0876 10037 0037 0178 10035 10217 10030 0030 10195 10487 10093 10236 10150 10178 11037 10836 10512 10195 10036 10011 10093 10150 10030 10092 10512 10208 10226 10668 11037 10037 10217 10486 10166 10037 11156 11982 10226 10508 10156 10051
46. 5 25 sec Adjusting the Backlight s Brightness The display s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps Default Step 3 Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press CHANNEL or CHANNEL The display gets one step brighter when is pressed The display gets one step darker when is pressed 3 Press RC SETUP to complete the setting Learning Function Resetting button by button Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 6 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press the button you want to reset twice The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Resetting by device mode Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 6 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset twice The signal transmission indicator flashes twice System call function Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 8 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice 3 Press
47. Auto Surround Mode Remote ID Dus Manual 2Way Remote Enhancer SE Setup Lock h Sharpness Maintenance Mode Firmware Update Add New Feature i i Language IZ page 40 When Screensaver is setto ON the screensaver is activated if no operation is performed for about 3 minutes 24 Auto Setup e Audyssey MultEQ XT automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment to create the best audio experience for your home theater e t optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are seated Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone DM A505Z successively at multiple positions throughout the listening area as shown in Example D For best results it is strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the measurements have the proper spatial weighting Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example 2 measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction Example 1 Z lt Example m Measuring positions About the listening position The main listening position refers to the most central position where one would normally sit within the listening environment MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance level polarity and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer
48. Built in 100BASE TX switch When connecting multiple devices we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater When using with a wireless LAN prepare a broadband router with built in access point Ethernet cable CAT 5 or greater recommended Use for wired LAN The AVC A1HD does not come with an Ethernet cable Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise We recommend using a normal type cable For the Ethernet cable used a shielded twisted pair STP cable Do not use an unshielded twisted pair UTP cable as it may exceed noise standard limits 1 Computer A computer with the following specifications is required to use a media server OS Windows XP Service Pack2 Windows Vista Software Prepare one of the following NET Framework 1 1 and Windows Media Connect Windows XP Windows Media Player ver 11 DLNA compatible server software Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 01 or later e LAN port e 300 MB or more free disk space X Free disk space is required to store music and video files The following sizes are approximate Format Bit rate Per minute Per hour 128 kbps Approx 1MB Approx 60MB MP3 WMA 192 kbps Approx 1 5 MB Approx 90MB MPEG 4AAC 256 kbps Approx 2MB Approx 120 MB 392 kbps Approx 3MB Approx 180 MB WAV LPCM 1400 kbps Approx 10 MB Approx 600 FLAC 1080 kbps Approx 77 MB Approx
49. Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily Press MEMO while the Internet radio station you want to register is playing 2 Use A V to select Favorites then press ENTER Press lt to select Yes The Internet radio station is registered If you do not want to register it press P y3eq e d 1 Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites Use A V to select Favorites then press ENTER or b Use to select the Internet radio station then press ENTER or b The AVC A1HD automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins 0 Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites Use V to select Favorites then press ENTER or b Use V to select the Internet radio station you want to clear then press Press to select Delete The selected Internet radio station is cleared To cancel the operation without clearing the station press gt 57 AN D ENTER C JNET DTU Tris 1 mode AY ma CES ENTER Main remote control unit ot USB Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 58
50. Set the subwoofer level for playback Select according to the player in use 5dB Selectable items 048 10dB 15dB I We recommend setting to 15 dB 32 2ch Direct Stereo Make speaker settings for 2 channel mode playback Downmix Option Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources Setting To change the settings select Custom Custom Selectable items Basic Use the same settings as in Speaker Setup Front Select front speaker size Selectable items Large Small Subwoofer Select subwoofer use Selectable items No Subwoofer Mode Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer LFE Main LFE THX Selectable items Crossover Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal Selectable items THX 40Hz 60Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz Distance FL Set distance from listening position to front left speaker Variable range 0 00m 18 00m Distance FR Set distance from listening position to front right speaker Variable range 0 00m 18 00m Selectable items ON e Get this to ON if the sound from the front speakers seems distorted e When not using the center speaker or surround speakers the playback sound is down mixed and output from the front speakers El
51. Zone Setup select the zone Mute Level 123 page 36 To cancel either adjust the volume or press MUTE again The setting is canceled when the zone s power is turned off The source selected ZONES is also output from the recording output connectors e When the MENU is selected it is possible to carryout Zone Setup looking at the on screen display in ZONE2 Also when the OSD is set as ZONE2 ZONE3 the on screen display comes on the ZONE2 monitor when ZONES has been operated so it is possible to operate it looking at this INPUT DVD SIGNAL ANALOG VOL 40dB gt 45 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit 4 OFF gt Dii is EE p On Lev LAST HPF 4 OFF 1 Mute Lev 4 FULL Lch Lev 4 OdBI amp Rch Lev 4 048 When connected to the component video output connectors the on screen display is not displayed The digital signal from the digital input connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL are output to the analog audio connectors in ZONE2 and ZONES in the case of PCM 2 channel signals only Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors cannot be played in multi zone The digital output OPTICAL from ZONE2 and ZONEA cannot be copyrighted network signals internet radio media server and USB When certain digital signals are being input noise may be output from the ZONE2 and audio output connectors
52. brand of the component to be preset The numbers are shown in the Preset Code Table 1287 End of the this manual When the code is registered the signal transmission indicator flashes twice When the preset code is transmitted the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs flashes The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10 seconds I Some brands have more than one preset code If the component does not operate try inputting a different code Operating Preset Components 1 Press MODE SELECTOR for the component to be operated The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes 2 Operate the component For details refer to the component s operating instructions Functions of Buttons by Component Ross rM EL Display i M0DE SELECTOR DVD VCR iPod i MODE I Device Mode SELECTOR gt DVD la gt e Device operated Default setting DVD Recorder Default setting CD Recorder VCR TAPE iPod 4 4 gt gt i II gt Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Pause i W L a bb Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search SOURCE i cue cue cue cue cue cue cue SOURCE OFF Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search
53. slow meter mode on a sound level meter at the listening position If a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the sound levels are the same Because adjusting the subwoofer level test tone by ear is difficult use a well known music selection and adjust for natural balance When the GUI menu Speaker Configuration Surround Back setting 87 page 28 is set to 1spkr the surround back speaker display is set to Surround Back Speakers set to None in the Speaker Configuration settings are not displayed e Surround can be set when GUI menu Speaker Configuration Surround is set to Large or Small rz amp page 28 When using surround speakers be sure to adjust the volume of the different speakers When Channel Level is adjusted the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes use the operation see page 63 Crossover Frequency Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal Selectable items FIXED THX Setup when using a THX certified speaker 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 10092 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set here is output Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers
54. speaker for 6 1 or 71 playback mode eThe monitor s input setting is Set properly e surround back speaker s Check the setting and change it 36 wrong power amplifier 5 assigned to as necessary PURE DIRECT mode is set Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode 46 different channel The player is connected using the e High definition 1080i 720p and sound is Subwoofer s power not turned Turn the subwoofer s power _ componentinput connectors the progressive 480p 576p video produced from on monitor is connected using the signals are not down converted subwoofer The Subwoofer setting aile Set to Yes 28 video yellow or S Video output Set the player to interlace Speaker configuration is set to connectors 4801 5761 signals T MEN i not properly e Check theconnections 10 No picture e The connections to the HDMI e Check the connections 12 connectors are faulty sihe subwoofers volue is SAGINSE INS EE with HDMI e HDMI input setting 18 improper e Check the HDMI input setting 41 connections The monitor is not compatible e Connect a monitor that is 12 EE with copyright protection compatible with copyright No test tones are Surround mode not set Set to the STANDARD Dolby 44 45 HDCP protection HDCP produced when to STANDARD Dolby DTS DTS Surround or HOME THX e The HDMI format of the
55. 0 3 20081 20240 20278 20637 20642 20081 20081 20037 20041 20045 20278 20037 20048 20047 20032 20000 20209 20807 20000 20039 20240 20000 20104 20037 20240 20320 20347 20081 20000 20046 20479 20037 20278 20642 20037 20240 20045 20348 20081 20209 20352 20348 20614 20616 21137 20046 20048 20046 20037 20278 20642 20035 20048 20047 20032 20033 20000 20067 20046 20106 20226 20636 21232 21872 1 20240 20000 20042 20278 20348 20352 20162 20037 20047 20033 20042 20104 20209 20041 20037 20081 20104 20046 20060 20035 20037 20048 Soundmaster Soundwave Stack 9 Standard Stern STS Sunkai Sunstar Suntronic Supra Susumu SV2000 SVA Sylvania Symphonic Systemax Systems Taisho Tandberg Tandy Tashiko Tatung Tchibo TCM Teac Technics TechniSat Technosonic Teco Tedelex Teknika Teleavia Telecorder Telefunken Telerent Telestar Teletech Tensai Tevion Texet Thomas Thomson Thorn Tisonic Tivo TMK 20000 20037 20209 20348 21972 20278 20278 20042 20209 20278 20348 20000 20000 20037 20278 20348 20037 20000 20000 20035 20081 20000 20043 21593 21781 20240 20000 20002 21593 21972 20162 21972 20209 20278 20000 20104 20037 20048 20081 20240 20000 20048 20081 20045 20000 20067 20043 20209 20041 20348 2035
56. 0764 0764 0877 0370 0817 0631 0009 0030 1911 0093 0037 0668 0009 0698 0060 0109 10343 0560 0610 0011 0668 1556 0208 0154 0171 0650 0054 0093 0178 0766 0817 1312 0371 0226 0090 0060 0371 0861 0054 10463 1755 0370 0170 0037 0009 10145 10171 10218 10264 10714 11037 10037 10264 0712 10817 0030 0625 10714 0618 1982 0817 10163 10287 10361 10498 0163 10217 10712 11037 0361 10480 0093 10178 0092 10009 0700 11755 10017 10154 10060 10812 10030 10092 10718 10618 10821 11060 11903 11959 10370 10362 10217 10208 10037 10036 10030 10706 10455 10602 11371 11537 10154 10000 10180 10145 11208 10704 10264 10217 10163 10108 10036 10011 SBR Sceptre Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scotch Scotland Scott Sears Seaway Seelver SEG SEI Sei Sinudyne Seleco Semivox Semp Sencora Sentra Serino Shancha Shanghai Shaofeng Sharp hen Ying hencai heng Chia henyang herwood hintoshi hivaki Siemens Siera Siesta Signature Silva Silva Schneider Silvano Silver SilverCrest 10037 1217 10361 0606 1982 0714 0394 0343 0070 10178 0163 10236 0047 0000 0060 0171 0037 0634 1037 0008 10218 0668 0037 0037 0163 0371 10180 0156
57. 1 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Matrix 6 1 and the AVC A1HD s AFDM setting is set to ON 2 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Discrete 6 1 details see 86 ka Operating from the unit main remote control unit Press the HOME THX CINEMA button on the main unit or the THX button on the main remote control unit Standard Playback This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according to the program source To select these surround modes pressing the STANDARD button on the main unit or press the STD button on the main remote control unit The mode switches each time the button is pressed Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources When using a surround back speaker Selectable items 001 DTS NEO 6 1 When not using a surround back speaker DOLBY PLII DTS NEO 6 Selectable items DOLBY PLIIx The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLIIx or or DOLBY PLII DOLBY PLII for playback Cinema This mode is suited for movie sources Music This mode is suited for music sources Game This mode is suited for games Pro Logic This is the Pro Logic playback mode This can be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLII decoder When this mode is selected DOLBY PL is displayed Operating from the unit The Cinema Music or Game modes can be directly selected with the CINEMA MUSIC or GAME bu
58. 1080 x x COMPONENT x x 4 4 4 4 480 720p 1 1 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 4801 5761 1 1 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 o 1080 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 55 VIDEO 1 55 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 a x 480p 720p x 1 1 VIDEO COMPONENT 3 3 x VIDEO x 480 576 x 1 1 1 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 4 1080 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 480 720 1 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO v 4801 5761 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 X COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 1080 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 z x 480p 720p O 1 1 S VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 S VIDEO S VIDEO lt 4801 5761 1 1
59. 15 2SP L R or 2SP The transducer signal is outputted from 5 Level Variable range 12dB OdB 1298 Set the transducer level OFF Turn the transducer output off 38 LPF Set the upper limit of the low frequency output to the transducer Selectable items 40Hz 60Hz 90Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250 2 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz Digital Out Set usage of OPT4 OUT ZONE4 Select Rec Select Selectable items The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to Rec Select Remote ID Set remote control ID Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver Selectable items 2 3 4 e When changing the remote ID also change the AMP iPod and NET DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time I page 67 When changing the remote ID also change the sub remote control unit at the same time 87 page 72 2Way Remote Make setting for 2 way remote control unit Selectable items Used When using 2 way remote control unit 7000 and RC 7001RCI sold separately set this to Used When using the 2 way remote control unit connect to the Port 1 RS 232C connector e When the 2way Remote is setup as Used the RS 232C connector cannot be used as the external controller El Dimmer Adjust display brightness of the recei
60. 200 00329 00455 00497 7795 00847 00853 00887 175 01323 01356 01423 693 01717 01848 01850 284 01375 111 710 299 01409 159 615 00879 01333 01433 247 00701 00455 00847 304 01404 01508 01526 527 173 00455 159 710 724 457 Philips Phonotrend Pilotime Pino Pioneer Planet Plasmatic PMB Polytron Portland Preisner Premier Prima Primacom Primestar Profile Promax Proscan Proton ONS Quadral Quelle Radiola RadioShack Radix RCA Rebox Regal RFT Roadstar Rollmaster Rover Rownsonic SAB Saba Sabre Sagem Samsung Sat Control Sat Team SAT Satec Satelco Satplus 01142 00749 01749 00775 00724 00819 01076 00722 00099 00710 00455 00818 00200 00847 00853 00173 01114 00133 01442 01543 01672 00863 01200 01339 01334 01142 00329 00853 01308 01442 00871 00442 00713 01611 00394 01296 00262 01101 01113 01366 00723 00853 00873 01429 00795 01111 00869 00710 00455 00392 00566 01535 01367 01402 01404 00710 00299 00200 00566 00775 00869 00394 00882 01113 01317 00392 00566 01142 00775 00855 00143 01291 01392 01442 01214 01251 00200 00713 00853 01413 00713 01567 01251 00710 00820 00455 00820 01114 01253 01307 01690 01377 01142 01276 01108 01109 00853 00863 01206 01442 01458 01570 01609 01700 01916 01300 00713 01409 00713 01232 01100
61. 31634 32134 30672 30699 30788 30898 31056 31104 31321 31923 30665 30843 31212 30672 30651 30751 30768 30790 30713 30713 30717 31832 30651 30690 30833 31005 31423 30672 31004 31056 30831 30788 30675 30831 31270 30705 30831 30783 31271 30831 3115 30833 31152 31730 30651 30665 30675 30713 30730 30783 30790 30831 31023 30713 30831 31023 31502 30521 30768 31233 31321 30714 31152 30730 30723 30751 30713 30850 30884 30770 31152 30850 31421 30672 30690 30770 30788 30850 31051 31115 31151 31233 31233 31321 30591 30675 30705 30821 31268 30591 13 14 Entivo Enzer ESA EuroLine Fenner Ferguson Finlux Firstline Fisher Funai Fusion Gateway GE General Electric Germatic Global Link Global Solutions Global Sphere 30503 30539 30784 30770 31228 30821 31268 30675 30788 31115 31233 30651 30651 30695 30713 30884 30898 31695 31730 30672 30591 30741 30751 30770 30783 30651 30713 30843 30869 31530 30670 30675 30695 31268 30862 31158 30522 30815 30717 30717 31051 31224 30768 31152 31044 31075 31099 31158 31483 31730 GoldStar 30591 30741 30869 30651 30690 30713 30723 me 1 31730 31923 GP Audio 31140 GPX 30699 30741 Gradiente 30490 30651 Graetz 30665 Gran Prix 30831 30898 Grandin
62. 464 MB For connections to the Internet contact an ISP Internet Service Provider or a computer shop contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details Depending on the server video files may be displayed but they cannot be played on the AVC A1HD Others f you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually make the settings at GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup page 33 34 With the AVC A1HD it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically When using a broadband router DHCP function the AVC A1HD sets the IP address etc automatically When using the AVC A1HD connected to a network with no DHCP function make the settings for the IP address etc at GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup IG page 33 34 The AVC A1HD is not compatible with PPPoE A PPPoE compatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the is set Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract it may be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the I
63. 97 Playing Files Stored on a Computer K sse ee EE 58 Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices 58 59 Specifications 97 98 Operating the AVC A1HD Using a Browser Web control 59 List of preset codes End of this manual Cautions Handling About the Remote Control Unit A 2 Before turning the power switch on In addition to the AVC A1HD the included main remote control unit a Getting Sta rted Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are 1067 can also be used to operate the equipment listed below cN no problems with the connection cables DENON system components Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is 2 Non DENON system components i 2 JE DENON ma i a m mE set to the standby mode When traveling or leaving home for long setting the preset memory IS page 64 66 manual carefully before using the 5 Pesce S y 9 periods of time be sure to unplug the power cord from the power By using the learn function CS 67 2 outlet After reading them be sure to keep them for future reference About condensation If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of Inserting the Batteries he unit and the surroundings condensation dew may form Accessories he operating parts inside the unit causing the unit not to operate
64. Auto Lip Sync Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output Selectable items ON OFF Audio Select HDMI audio output device O HDMI Control Make settings for HDMI control function Selectable items TV GUI menu Control Control is the Amp and TV will switch with the operation of any television not related to this setting Monitor Out Make settings for HDMI monitor output Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Auto Dual Selectable items pia Operating from the main remote control unit Press the M SEL button Auto Dual Monitor 1 Monitor 2 When Monitor Out is set to Auto Dual connections with the MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized automatically elf both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and Resolution is set to Auto 87 page 43 the signals are output with a resolution compatible with both monitors elf Resolution is set to something other than Auto check the resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu Information HDMI Information Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 and set accordingly 5 page 51 Control Set HDMI control function to ON OFF ON OFF Selectable items Set as OFF when connecting with devices incompatible with the HDMI control function Co
65. COMPONENTZZ COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 Signal present X No output X Output according to Resolution setting i p Scaler When A to H is set X No signal 1 The Picture Adjust setting be made Contrast Brightness IS page 42 480p 720p 480p 576p 1080i 720p Chroma Level Hue Wallpaper or set background color displayed 2 The Picture Adjust setting can be made DNR Enhancer E Output according to Resolution setting i p Scaler When H to H is Sharpness set ES page 42 3 Superimposed over video signal GUI menu not displayed 4 Only displayed when the MENU button is pressed 5 If the input signal is in SECAM format it is converted to PAL for output e f the input signal is a component 1080p signal to HDMI is not possible The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080 signal computer s resolution e g VGA are input e The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following formats NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC4 43 PAL N PAL M and PAL 60 e When SECAM signals of video input are up converted the signals are output in PAL format from the S Video connector 91 Video Convert Input signal Monitor output Normally Monitor output when GUI
66. Check STEP5 Store 25 Start Start Auto Setup The Audyssey MultEO XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates the size level distance bass management crossover frequency and optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer Audyssey MultEO XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area Before starting connect and position all your speakers Once started MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each speaker If an error message appears during the measurements check Error Messages IG page 27 take the advised action then start the measurements again Configuration The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time here 1 1 1 Selectable items 74 EN 9 2 i 7 2 52 3 3 3 9 3 7 3 5 3 1 This can be set when Subwoofer is set to 15 2 This can be set when Subwoofer is set to 2SP L R or 2SP MIX 3 This can be set when Subwoofer is set to 3SP L R LFE or 3SP Setting the correct speaker configuration can reduce the time required to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not have to look for speakers that are not connected Subwoofer The configuration of the measuring subwoofer can be selected beforehand Selectable items 1SP 2SP L R 25 MIX 3SP L R LFE 3SP MIX 26 Amp Assign Advanced setting changes power amplifier assignment The items selectab
67. Deep color 10 bit 12 bit signals are converted into 8 bit signals The scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer s resolution signals are input Resolution Set resolution for video signal output to HDMI Selectable items Auto 480p 576p 10801 720p 1080 C Operating from the main unit Press the SCALE button Auto 480p 576p 1080i 4 1080 720p r e This can be set when up Scaler is set to anything other than OFF e When the i p Scaler is set to A to H amp H to H the resolutions can be setup to the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal e t is not possible to convert 10801 signals into 720p format e t is not possible to convert 720p signals into 10801 format Progressive Mode Select optimum progressive mode for video material Selectable items Video Video2 This can be set when Scaler is set to anything other than OFF Aspect This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i 576i or 480p 576p input signals from the HDMI output connector Full Normal Selectable items This can be set when Scaler is set to anything other than OFF Input Mode Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source The selectable input modes depend on the input source and Assign setting IG page 41 42 Input Mode
68. Magnasonic 0418 0163 0714 0154 0486 1037 0009 0037 0009 0037 0009 1196 0037 0054 0030 1178 0700 0361 0108 0037 0037 0009 0668 1137 0817 0236 0009 0009 0698 1037 0037 0790 0236 0009 0773 0668 0264 1982 0009 1037 0037 0264 0009 0163 0361 1037 0047 0000 0060 0171 0035 0009 0195 0346 0634 0037 1498 0054 0073 0054 0030 10217 10808 10264 0327 11904 0817 0037 11163 10661 0163 0000 0092 0374 1265 1758 10856 0698 10217 0037 10037 10683 10180 0208 10370 0180 0011 0880 10163 10073 10361 10208 10480 0054 10156 10053 0166 0001 10037 10217 10374 10865 10587 10602 10512 10060 10371 10556 10208 10714 10156 10109 0060 1637 0715 0556 0163 10009 0218 0714 0030 0362 0163 0217 0548 0017 0051 0178 0037 0109 0287 0480 0001 10633 10001 10698 11037 11217 10093 0178 1191 0714 0370 0109 0374 1037 0001 0374 0217 0346 0631 0154 0093 0030 0036 0163 0343 0512 agnum Majestic andor Manesth anhattan Marantz ark Master s astro Masuda atsui Matsushita axdorf Maxent axim MCE eck Mediator edio
69. Mastec 20642 aster s 20278 atsushita 2 20162 20081 20226 Media Center 21972 ediator 20081 Medion 20209 20348 20352 20642 El 20035 20035 20162 20037 20048 20039 20047 20240 20000 Memorex 20104 20209 20278 20046 20348 20479 21162 21237 21262 etronic 20081 21062 20162 20037 20081 Metz 20226 20347 20836 21162 21262 21562 GA 20060 20240 20043 MGN Technology 20240 20348 20209 icrosoft 21972 Midland 20240 igros 20000 Mind 21972 inolta 20042 20060 20048 20047 20081 Mitsubishi 20000 20042 20067 20043 20041 20480 20642 20807 otorola 20035 20048 20240 20000 20000 Multitec 20037 ultitech 20039 20000 Murphy 20000 yryad 20081 NAD 20240 20104 Naiko 20348 20642 NAP 20039 National 20226 PRESET CODE Nebula Electronics EC Neckermann esco Neufunk ewave Nikkai ikko Nikkodo ishi Niveus Media oblex Nokia Nordmende Northgate Nu Tec Oceanic Okano Olympus Onimax Onkyo Optimus Orion Orson Osaki Otake Otto Versand Pace Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Pathe Cinema Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco 20033 20035 20037 20048 20104 20067 20041 20278 20038 21137 20081 20041 20000 20209 20037 20278 20037 20278 20037 20278 20240 21972 20240 20048 20081 20240 20042 20104 20041 20278 20046 20106 20315 20
70. NOTE4 BASS 6 dB TREBLE 4 dB NOTES Can be used according to the Direct Mode setting Can be set when GUI menu Parameter Audio Room EQ 49 is set to Audyssey Audyssey Flat Audyssey Byp L R 85 Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals Button Input signals WMA DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD AUDIO Super Audio CD Windows LINEAR DOLBY Note Media Aud 5 E ANALOG edia Audio DTS ES DTS ES DTS DTS DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DVD DVD DSD DSD WAV MP3 DSCRT MTRX 5 1ch 96 24 DIGITAL EX With no DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio Audio multich eh MPEG 4 With Flag With Flag With Flag FI 5 1 5 4ch 4 3ch 2ch multi ch 2ch FLAC ag HOME THX CINEMA ES DSCRT6 1 THX EET ES MTRX6 1 1 x O x x x x x x x SURROUND 2 9 2 CH THX Ultra2 Cinema 2 O O O Mode 92 x Games Mode 2 O O O O O O O O O O PLllx C 3 O O O O O O O O O O O O PLII C THX x
71. Playing Files Stored on a Computer Use this procedure to play music files image files or playlists Use A V to select Media Server then press ENTER or Use A V to select the host name of the computer on which the music file you want to play is located then press ENTER or b Use A V to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or b Use A V to select the file then press ENTER or P Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 Selecting tracks During playback either press A previous track V next track When playing still picture JPEG files files also be selected using the operation described below During playback either press previous file or V next file Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files IS page 20 Before starting you must launch the computer s server software and set the files as server contents For details see the operating instructions of your server software Depending on the size of the still picture JPEG file some time may be required for the file to be displayed Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites Files can be preset registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations Presettings are erased by overwriting them When the operation described below is performed the media ser
72. SYSTEM CALL 1 2 or 3 you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Punch through function 1 2 3 4 Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset TV or SAT CBL Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 4 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice settings 1 Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 1 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times All the settings are restored to their defaults 69 23 zl z 5 Izd 3 e Burner suon uuoo dnuae euoz n niN uoneunoju 2 2 Sub Remote Control Unit Operations The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used buttons so it can be used for simple remote control unit operations The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi zone so you can use it to control the AVC A1HD from other rooms The operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit Switching the input source Ad
73. Set the input mode for this source Input source PHONO iPod Selectable items Analog EXT IN Input source NET USB Selectable items Auto EXT IN Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX TUNER CD Selectable items Auto HDMI Digital Analog EXT IN oO e When a digital signal is properly input the 516 indicator lights on the display If the pi amp indicator does not light check the digital input connector assignment and the connections The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to EXT IN m Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on the main remote control unit Auto HDMI 1 m Digital 2 EXT IN Analog lt 1 This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu Assign setting is set to HDMI 41 Excluding CD and TUNER 2 This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu Assign setting is set to Digital ES page 42 Decode Mode Set the decode mode for this source Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX TUNER CD S
74. Universum Vestel Victor Waltham Yakumo Yamada Yamaha Yukai Zenith 31403 31730 31404 31158 31056 31321 30490 31579 30646 31158 30631 31635 31033 31070 31431 31433 31536 31227 227 31347 31730 227 31530 056 31158 30646 31730 30741 PRESET CODE 15 DVD preset codes DVD Voreinstellungscodes Codes pr r gl s DVD Codici di preselezione DVD 32134 30490 C digos de preajuste de DVD DVD voorkeuzecodes F rinst llda DVD koder DENON Model No DVD 550 DVD 2800II DVD 800 Modellnr DVD 700 DVD 2900 DVD 1600 Mod le num ro DVD 900 DVD 2910 DVD 2000 Modello No DVD 1000 DVD 2930 DVD 2500 N de modelo DVD 1400 DVD 3800 DVD 3000 Modelnr DVD 1500 DVD 3910 DVD 3300 Modellnr DVD 1710 DVD 3930 DVD 1910 DVD A11 DVD 1930 DVD A1 DVD 2200 DVD A1XV DVD 2800 Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory Sie Voreinstellungscodes wurden vor der Auslieferung werkseitig eingestellt Les codes pr r gl s diff rent en fonctiom des livraison de l usine codici di presettaggio sono impostati in fabbrica prima della consegna Los c digos vienen preprogramados de f brica Vooringestelde codes bij hey verlaten van de fabriek F rinst llda koder har st llts in vid transporten fran fabriken 16 PRESET CODE X1 X2 X3 X4 These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT CBL mode Diese voreingestellten Code
75. X O DOLBY PL THX O O O O x 6 x 8 ULTI CH 7 1 THX x x x 71 CH 5 1 THX x STANDARD DTS SURROUND DTS ES DSCRT6 1 Si eo x x x 5 DTS ES MTRX6 1 eo E DTS SURROUND x x x E DTS 96 24 S DTS PLIlx CINEMA 2 x x x DTS PLIIx MUSIC S i DTS NEO 6 1 Q DTS 6 CINEMA e D C DTS 6 MUSIC O X Mode selectable in initial status 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to None Mode fixed when AFDM is 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None Selectable mode 3 For input signals other than 2 channel signals this mode cannot be selected when surround back speaker is setto X Non selectable mode 1spkr or None 86
76. eh 9 5 o External Controller Connecting the Power Cord Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord 200 Ben S S KE Qi Semer NJ 1 w ronan This connector is used for an external controller X If you wish to control the AVC A1HD from an external controller using the RS 232C connector perform the operation below beforehand D Turn on the AVC A1HD s power 2 off the AVC A1HD s power from the external controller 3 Check that the AVC A1HD is in the standby mode ETHERNET EE 232 e When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller RC 7000CI sold separately and RF Remote Receiver RC 7001RCI sold separately two way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible The AVC A1HD S status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed watching the RF Remote Controller s display For details refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller and RF Remote Receiver make the settings at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup 2Way Remote Used I page 38 When using the 2 way remote control unit connect
77. live concert in a jazz club CLASSIC CONCERT This mode is for appreciating classical concert programs MONO MOVIE 2 This mode is for playing monaural movie sources with surround sound VIDEO GAME This mode is suited for achieving surround sound with video games MATRIX This mode lets you add a sense of expansion to stereo music sources 1 Can also be set by pressing the 7CH STEREO button on the main unit However the GUI menu is not displayed 2 When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE mode the sound will be off balance with a single channel left or right so input to both channels 45 5 043405 6 Dunoouse qnouj suomoouuo dnjes o 31405 HINA 10116114014 1 31009 Press the DSP SIMULATION button on the main unit or SIMU button on the main remote control unit to switch the surround mode The mode switches each time the button is pressed Depending on the program source being played it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect In this case try other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes Stereo Playback Selectable items 5 This is the mode playing in stereo The adjusted Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer When the main unit s DIRECT STEREO butto
78. space such as a bookcase or similar enclosure Put the rear cover back on 191 Z Note Part Names and Functions e Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even me when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit For buttons not explained here see the page indicated in parentheses Kr e The supplied batteries are only verifying operation When inserting the batteries be sure to do so in the proper direction To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid Front Panel 2 Do not use a new battery together with an old 2 e Do not use two different types of batteries 5 Do not attempt to charge dry batteries Do not short circuit disassemble heat or dispose of batteries in flames e f the battery fluid should leak carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods When replacing the batteries have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible O z a a Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it pe Hey fue we ES HAM GRY Hom 0
79. w Language SE E ES E EE E RS E EE ES i Manual Setup Source Select Speaker Setup vore AE AEE E E AE a PE A re tae SOOT Speaker Configuration Subwoofer Setup SE EE Ee EE D Channel m Crossover Frequency THX Audio Setup Surround Speaker GEES HDMI Setup Zeeche ale eee cele oui wae cx maU Color Space RGB Range Auto Lip 121 t Nite UE O HDMI Control Audio Setup rU E MM EKT IN TG Direct Stereo encom sersenae onset Downmix Option ee ENEE Auto Surround Mode Kanale 220222 226 55 Network Setup enne ie ME AU eis AEE Network Setup Other EE Network Information Zone Setup dedu EES T 7 SIDES Option Setup Amp Assign EE COMO LT Input Source Selection 8 1 40 Settings Related to Playing Input 5 5 00 41 E Pistes 41 e EE 41 42 D Video SETE E pe ser EES 227 43 Input Mode 43 A Souree Level 22222022 00000021 0200222008 43 NEE 44 TEE 44 Surround Mode C TETTE Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc Standard Playback Ze AE
80. 0171 0000 0451 0108 0606 8377 0009 0876 0009 0001 0037 0217 0565 0264 0009 0163 0009 18 0668 02 02 0805 0037 051 0180 02 001 081 0226 7 0037 0486 0808 08 7 2 7 H 2 0030 0054 0698 1037 1032 0037 0668 0370 0037 0374 0717 0614 1163 10037 10264 10714 10264 10180 10875 11958 0264 10817 0556 10178 10001 10264 0821 11037 1191 1756 10163 10370 10820 11909 10009 0217 10009 0073 0343 10037 10374 11037 10195 10195 10606 10017 10109 10217 10370 10374 10715 10820 10370 10486 10374 10661 11196 11163 10030 10154 10093 10218 10418 10374 10821 11037 10092 10623 11937 11951 10011 10036 10264 10374 10109 10208 10163 10217 10455 10556 10361 10455 10009 10208 10374 10661 10370 10418 10714 10715 Blackway Blaupunkt Blue Sky Boots BPL Bradford Brandt Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Brother BSR BIC Bush Caihong Cailing Candle Canton Capehart Capetronic Capsonic Carad Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Celestial Centrex Centrum Centurion CGE Changcheng Changfei Changfeng Changhai 10218 10036
81. 30713 31233 Greenhill 30717 30539 30651 30551 30670 NE 31695 31730 31832 31920 Grunkel 30770 30790 30831 H amp B 30841 30850 31233 30751 31152 Haier 30843 Hanseatic 30741 30783 30790 Harman Kardon 30582 30702 HCM 30788 HDT 30705 HE 30730 31163 31923 Henss 30713 HiMAX 30843 Hitachi suet 30665 30713 Hiteker 30672 31923 FIORI 2 30713 30831 31004 PRESET CODE 30573 30744 30717 30715 30741 30783 30833 30869 Home Electronics 30730 30770 Home Tech Industries 31224 Hoyo 30665 Humax 30646 Hyundai 30783 30850 31061 31228 iLo 31348 ngelen 30788 ngersol 31023 nitial 30839 30717 nno Hit 30713 nsignia 31268 ntegra 30571 30627 31634 rradio 30869 31115 31224 31233 RT 30783 SP 30695 Jamo 31036 Jaton 30665 JBL 30702 JDB 30730 JDV 31367 Jeken 30699 Jepssen 31250 JMB 30695 JNC 30672 31271 JSI 31423 JVC 30503 30539 30558 30623 30867 31164 31597 31860 jWin 31051 Kansas Technologies 31233 31530 Karcher 30783 Kawasaki 30790 Kendo 30672 30699 30713 30831 Kennex 30713 30770 30898 Kenwood 30490 30534 Kiiro 30770 Kiss 30665 30841 31523 KLH 30815 30717 30790 31020 Kloss 30533 Koda 31230 Konka 31192 Koss 30651 31061 31423 Kreisen 31421 KXD 31321 31923 Lasonic 30627 30798 30789 Lawson 30768 Lecson 31533 Leiker 30872 TM E 30699 30713 30770 Lenoir 31228 Lenoxx 3069
82. 4ch 4 3ch 2ch multi ch 2ch ch FLAC PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT O O O 9 DSD PURE DIRECT x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x DSD MULTI PURE 8 ULTI CH PURE DIRECT O x O x PURE D CINEMA 2 PURE D PLIIx MUSIC O x O x CH PURE DIRECT 71 DSP SIMULATION 7CH STEREO b 2 O WIDE O O O O O O Q O O O O SUPER STADIUM O O O O Wi O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O JAZZ CLUB O O CLASSIC CONCERT O O O O O O O O O 2 Q O O e 8 VIDEO GAME O O O O O Q O e 8 Q g O O 5 5 2 O S NOTE Mode selectable in initial status Selectable mode Non selectable mode 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to None 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None 5 f the surround back speaker setup is set to None and when usin
83. A1HD can be operated in the same way as with regular Internet browsing To use the web control function set the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Other Power Saving setting to OFF 1257 page 35 59 y eq ejd ERIT NRI SOURCE SELECT Surround mode INPUT MODE lt ZONE2 3 4 PHONES REC SELECT C AMP SOURCE SELECT About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 60 Other Operations and Functions Other Operations Playing Super Audio CD Assign DENON LINK with the Digital setting or assign HDMI with the HDMI setting CS page 41 42 2 Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press SOURCE SELECT to select the input source assigned in step 1 The ENS indicator lights on the display Use INPUT MODE to select the input mode 125 page 43 Select the input mode according to the program source to be played Select the surround mode CS page 44 46 We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode Start playing the Super Audio CD The psp indicator lights on the display For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s operating instructions e When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode the DSD signals
84. Advanced setup button Input source select buttons CHANNEL buttons MENU button Cursor buttons V4 ee SEARCH button REPEAT RANDOM button Remote control signal transmttter 4 B ZONE SELECT button 72 D Zone power on off buttons ZONE ON ZONE OFF 78 Master volume control buttons VOLUME eue teneret D Muting button MUTE ENTER button D RETURN button e D System buttons ALL MUSIC FAVORITES DIRECT PLAY button 70 D USB DIRECT PLAY 70 The AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 SAT TU DTU SHIFT and OPTION buttons cannot be used p ue1s lt Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in these operating instructions Please select the types of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting With some types of connections certain settings must be made on the AVC A1HD For details refer to the instructions for the respective connection items below Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the other
85. Aristona Arrgo ASCOMTEC Asono Aspire Digital Atacom Audiosonic Audiovox Audioworld Autovox Auvio Awa Axion Base Basic Line Baze BBK Beep Bellagio Belson Binatone Black Diamond Blaupunkt Blu sens Blue Nova International Blue Parade 30690 30695 30705 30770 30788 30790 30884 30898 30899 31115 31205 31233 31685 30838 31005 30699 31321 30898 31051 31140 31233 31367 30672 30539 30717 30695 30699 30713 30730 30783 30884 31140 31530 31695 30790 31151 31451 30869 31224 30784 30770 30850 30852 30872 30713 30770 31151 31367 30872 31913 30759 30774 30831 31004 31020 31056 31061 30539 30646 31023 31923 31224 31168 31224 30690 31923 30717 30790 30790 30713 30843 30730 30872 30730 31451 30713 30898 30862 31224 31163 31004 31086 31923 31923 30713 30833 30884 30717 31233 31321 31321 30571 30533 30672 30717 30755 30794 30796 30797 30830 Blue Sky Boghe Boman Bose Brainwave Brandt Broksonic Bush Byd sign C Tech California Audio Labs Cambridge Audio Cambridge Soundworks Campomatic Digital Cat CCE Celestial cello Centrex Centrum CGV Changhong Cinea Cinetec cineULTRA CineVision Citizen Clairtone Classic Clatronic Clayton Coby Codex Commax Conia Contel Continental Edison Craig Creative Crown Crypto Curtis Mathes Cybercom Cy
86. Audio 40157 Fujitsu 01497 0003 00000 00008 01510 Technology PRESET CODE 1 Technics echwood Thomson horens Thule Audio okai Universum Victor Wadia Wards Y Yamaha Yorx lt CD Recorder Denon JVC RCA Sony Teac Sanne Thomson Tape Deck Awa Akai Arcam Audiolab Carver Denon Fisher Garrard Genexxa GoldStar Grundig Harman Kardon Inkel JVC Kenwood LG Luxman Magnavox Marantz Memorex Mitsubishi Myryad 0 Onkyo Optimus 40393 40420 40490 40393 40420 40029 40303 40303 40053 40157 40157 40420 40157 40053 40072 40393 40000 40032 40157 40053 40087 40179 40490 40868 40032 40036 40000 40766 42868 40072 40053 40420 40000 40100 41364 40420 40053 0029 20197 20200 21315 0283 20439 0076 0029 0029 0076 20371 21311 22471 0074 0308 20309 20375 20439 0439 0375 0029 20375 0182 20029 21314 0070 20071 20337 2 2 2 2 2 2 0304 20310 21309 0234 21364 0375 0308 20309 0029 0029 20009 0099 0283 20439 0029 0135 20136 20282 20027 20220 20337 20439 2 PRESET CODE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20273 20274 20303 A 20071 20092 20233 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 U V W Y HDTV Tuner 1 A TOM Oc Orion Palladium Panasonic Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Polk
87. Auto Surround Mode Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type Selectable items ON OFF The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below CD Analog and PCM 2 channel signals 2 Dolby Digital and DTS 2 channel signals 3 Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel signals 4 Multi channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS PCM DSD etc When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed Manual Ell Network Setup Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer Make settings for wired or wireless LAN Adjust CH Wired LAN settings Select speaker adjustment method Make settings for wired LAN Selectable items Each LR All Turn on the AVC A1HD s power If a Ethernet cable is connected The mode automatically switches to Wired Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level Selectable items 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz Variable range 20dB 0 698 To acquire the IP address automatically To enter the IP address manually using the DHCP function 3 Curve Copy Copy the Room EQ s Audyssey Flat correction curve 043405 At the GUI menu Manual Setup N
88. B MULTI CH MODE Selectable items A B Operating from the remote control unit Press the SPKR button r Surround Surround Surround A B This can be set when GUI menu Speaker Configuration Surround A and Surround B are used IG page 28 When using the pre out connectors select and use either Surround A or Surround B Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to EXT IN at GUI menu Manual Setup Audio Setup EXT IN Setup IS page 32 About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both Surround speakers A and B If Small is set for either surround speakers A or B the output is the same as when Small is set for both A and B HDMI Setup settings for video audio output Menu tree Manual Setup Color Space RGB Range Auto Lip Sync Audio Monitor Out O HDMI Control Ell Color Space Make settings for output color space Selectable items YCbCr RGB When connected to a monitor with a DVI D connector HDCP compatible using an HDMI DVI converter cable the signals are output in RGB format regardless of this setting RGB Range Make settings for RGB output range Enhanced Normal Selectable items r When YCbCr is selected under Color Space RGB Range will have no effect
89. GUI Graphical User Interface D E N Q N Usethis manualin combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen GUI Menu Operation I page 23 GUI Menu page 24 Language I page 40 Remote Control Unit Operations I page 64 AV SURROUND AMPLIFIER AVC A1HD Owner s Manual I SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION A RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK A DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCETHE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE C 041 30 R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC This product may be operated in the following countries AT BE CZ DK Fl FR DE GR HU IE IT NL 5 ES SE GB NO CH DECLARATION OF CONFORMIITY Hereby amp Holdings Inc Denon Brand Company
90. Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart you will need to go THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing which will re optimize the surround sound field ASA is used in three new modes THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode Boundary Gain Compensation If your chosen listening room layout for practical or aesthetic reasons results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall the resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary hat the overall sound quality becomes boom THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC Boundary Gain Compensation eature to provide an improved bass balance BGC can be selected by choosing THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Yes from the Boundary Gain Compensation section of the THX Audio setup menu 7 THX and Re EQ THXTimbre Matching THX Adaptive Decorrelation and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved d THX Surround EX 1999 a new surround system was launched simultaneously with the release of the movie Star Wars Episode 1
91. RESTORER HO The default setting for NET USB and iPod is Mode3 All others are set to OFF g Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit During playback press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the RSTR button on the main remote control unit When set to something other than OFF is displayed OFF Mode1 Mode2 RESTORER 64 RESTORER 96 Mode 3 RESTORER HQ m About the RESTORER function e Such compressed audio formats as MP3 WMA Windows Media Audio and MPEG 4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals e This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to NET USB or when analog signals or PCM signals fs 44 1 48 kHz are input Night Mode Optimized setting for late night listening Selectable items OFF Low Middle High Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Press the NIGHT button on the main unit or the NGT button on the main remote control unit The indicator lights when Low Middle or High is selected g
92. Schneider 31367 11922 Internal 20278 20637 Thomas 20000 Technica 11982 SEG 30713 30884 S 10625 J JBL 20278 Tamma 20278 Telefunken 10698 Sliding 31115 Samsung 11959 JMB 20352 Toshiba 20352 20432 20845 21145 Thomson 10625 Stevison 31367 Sansui 10463 11904 11911 Kambrook 20037 U United 20740 e Transonic 10587 Sylvania 30630 30675 31268 Schneider 10037 10556 11904 neissel 20278 20352 White U United 10587 11037 11982 T Technica 31367 Sears 11904 L i6 20037 20480 21237 W Westinghouse 20278 20637 V vestel 11037 Thomson 30551 Sharp 10093 11917 Lloyd s 20000 Z Zenith 20000 20479 20637 21479 xA Toshiba 30695 Siemens 10037 Loewe 20037 x4 30695 U United 30713 30884 31367 sonya 10000 11505 11904 M Magnasonic 20278 21278 T Thomson 30551 Akura 31367 Universum 30713 Sylvania 10054 Magnavox 20081 20000 21781 V Vestel 30884 Symphonic 11904 Magnin 20240 Alba 30695 30884 T Teac 10178 10171 Matsui 20352 20742 TV VCR DVD Combination Amstrad 31367 3 2 X3 X4 Apex Dri 30830 Technics 10556 Medion 20352 ox 5 25 Thomas 11904 20162 20037 21162 21237 2 B Black Diamond 30713 30884 aR E emorex 21262 A 11808 omson Broksonic 30695 A Awa 11904 11911 Toshiba 11971 MGA u 20240 B Broksonic 11938 Bush 30713 30884 Amea Adian cme Mitsubishi 20048 20081 20043 20807 Emerson m C Centrum 30713 Amstrad 10171 Westinghouse Um Optimus Se Au ESA 11944 iti e 9 x oe em Audiov
93. Show Make slideshow settings Selectable items ON Interval Set the playback time per image Variable range 5s 605 44 Surround Mode HOME THX CINEMA THX surround sound mode to recreate the authentic sound of movie soundtracks Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources Selectable items CINEMA CINEMA Pro Logic 6 CINEMA Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc Selectable items HOME THX CINEMA This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing THX surround sound The display when the HOMETHX CINEMA mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode Input signal Display pica HHX SURROUND EX THX Ultra2 Cinema Dolby other than 2ch THX Music Mode Digital DOLBY DIGITAL EX THX Games Mode Source DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY HHX Cinema PLIIx C THX DTS 5 1ch ES MTRX6 1 THX 1 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 ES DSCRT6 1 THX 2 DTS DTS ES Matrix 6 1 THX Ultra Cinema Surround DTS 96 24 THX Music Mode Source DTS HD High THX Games Mode Resolution Audio THX Cinema DTS HD Master Audio PLIIx C THX THX SURROUND EX THX Ultra2 Cinema DVD PCM multi ch THX Music Mode Audio DSD multi ch THX Games Mode SACD PLIIx C THX M CH 5 1 THX M CH 71 THX
94. Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room THX recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually Sometimes due to interaction with the room you may notice irregular results when setting the level and or distance of the main speakers If this happens THX recommends setting them manually Please note that any THX main speakers should be set to Small 80 Hz If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover Select Retry to make the measurements again legen Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections Option Select settings for room mic etc o Room EQ Select room EQ setting method All Selectable items Assign Direct Mode Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode ON OFF Selectable items Mic Select Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic The microphone connected to V AUX Lch is used Selectable items Mic VAUXL Only a professionally certified installer should ever connect professionally calibrated microphone to the V AUX L input on the front panel Parameter Check Check auto setup measurement results This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is completed FL Selectable items Spkr Config Ch
95. Standard This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current DES and 3DES and because of its high security it is expected to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future It uses the Rijndael algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block It supports data lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits as well offering extremely high encryption security 90 Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output et 5 MAIN ZONE Video Convert Input signal Monitor output Monitor output when GUI menu displayed T HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO a x x x x X 4 4 SA SA 8 X VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 1 5 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 VIDEO 3 x S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 9 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 1 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 S VIDEO 3 5
96. When DENON LINK is assigned at the GUI menu Assign setting the PCM signals network audio signals Internet radio media server and USB input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONES analog audio output connectors Other Information BEEN About Speaker Installation Surround back speakers The THX Surround EX format adds new Surround Back SB channels to the conventional 5 1 channel system This makes it easy to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener something that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventiona multi surround speakers In addition the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position Change of positioning and acoustic image with 5 1 channel systems Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL Change of positioning and acoustic image with 6 1 channel systems Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL In addition to sources recorded in 6 1 channels the surround effect of conventional 2 to 5 1 channel sources can also be enhanced Speaker s for one or two channels are required in order to achieve a THX Surround EX system with the AVC A1HD Adding these however allows yo
97. a richer sound The default setting is e Press lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER OFF and set the AVC A1HD s power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod Also switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu iPod dock is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod Depending on the type of iPod and the software version some functions may not operate DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data Listening to Music Use A V to select the menu then press ENTER or gt to select the music file to be played Press ENTER or Playback starts Stopping playback temporarily During playback press ENTER or P Press again to resume playback Fast forwarding or fast reversing During playback either press and hold A to fast reverse or V to ast forward or press or gt gt To cue to the beginning of a track During playback either press A to cue to the previous track or V to cue to the next track or press 1494 or gt gt To stop During playback either press and hold ENTER or press Playing repeatedly Press CHANNEL or REPEAT on the sub remote control unit Selectable items All One OFF Gul Source Select input source Playback Mode iPod Repeat 1257 page 41 53 1043405 aS 3U07 uoneunoju sa qnoauj Sh
98. according to the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at Crossover Frequency I page 29 30 When Front is set to Small Subwoofer is automatically set to Yes elf Subwoofer is set to Front is automatically set to Large f Surround A is set to None Surround B and Surround Back are automatically set to When using just one surround back speaker connect it to the left channel SBL To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified speaker systems set the front center and surround speaker size parameters to Small and the subwoofer to Yes Subwoofer Setup Select subwoofer output configuration and bass signal for playback Configuration 0 LB Select number of subwoofers and configuration Selectable items 15 2SP 2SP MIX 3SP L R LFE 3SP MIX Subwoofer Configuration Subwoofer Connector 1SP SW1 SW1 2SP L R R SW2 1 SW1 2SP MIX 2 SW2 SW1 3SP L R LFE R SW2 LFE SW3 1 SW1 3SP MIX 2 SW2 3 SW3 When 25 5 is selected Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 and Subwoofer 3 are each displayed Mode Select bass signal for playing with the subwoofer Selectable items LFE THX LFE Main a THX recomm
99. and station cannot be connected to Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Internet radio e Ethernet cable is not properly e Check the connection status 20 iPod cannot be The input source assigned Switch to the input source 42 cannotbe played connected or network is played iPod dock is not selected assigned at iPod dock disconnected e Cable is not properly connected e Reconnect 14 e Program is being broadcast in e Only Internet radio programs in 54 55 e Control Dock for iPod s e Plug the Control Dock for iPod s non compatible format MP3 and WMA can be played on adapter is not connected to adapter into a power outlet this set power outlet eThe computers or router s e Check the computer s or router s _ firewall is activated firewall settings e Radio station is not currently e Choose a radio station that is 57 NET USB broadcasting currently broadcasting Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page P address is wrong Check the set s IP address 35 When a USB The set cannot recognize a USB e Check the connection 19 Files stored ona eFiles are stored in non Record in a compatible format 54 55 memory device memory device computer cannot compatible format is connected eA USB memory device Connect a USB memory device _ be played e You are attempting to play a file e Files that are copyright protected 54 55 USB is not conforming to
100. be played on the AVC A1HD Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected Also files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD etc on a computer may be copyright protected depending on the computer s settings Media server and USB e The AVC A1HD is compatible with ID3 Tag Ver 2 standards The AVC A1HD is compatible with WMA META tags Playable formats Sampling Bit rate Extension frequency WMA Windows 3 Media Audio 32 44 1 48 kHz 48 192 kbps wma MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer3 32 44 1 48 kHz 32 320 kbps mp3 WAV 32 44 1 48 kHz _ MACH 4 32 44 1 48 kHz 16 320 kbps aac m4a mp4 FLAC Free Lossless Audio 32 44 1 48 kHz Codec WAV format Quantization bit rate 16 bits 55 E BITS NRI z Stopping playback temporarily lt SOURCE SELECT gt ENTER AV lt gt Basic Operation During playback press ENTER 1 Make the necessary preparations to resume playback To stop D Check the network environment then turn on the AVC A1HD s During the play or pause mode press and hold ENTER power IS page 20 Network Audio 2 If settings are required make the network settings Searching up or down pages 57 33 35 Network Setup Press SEARCH then press 1 down or gt up 3 Prepare the computer IG Comp
101. cables is faulty e Device you want to play and set Select an appropriate input 40 input source do not match source e Master volume is turned the master volume to an 52 low appropriate level Mute mode is set Cancel the mute mode 52 Headphones are connected Disconnect the headphones 52 No digital signals are being e Select an input source for which 40 42 input the digital input setting has been made e The connectors to which the eSet the input mode 43 digital inputs are assigned and the settable input modes do not match Display is off e The Dimmer setting is set Set to something other than 38 OFF OFF The PURE DIRECT mode is set Set a surround mode other than 46 the PURE DIRECT mode DOLBY DIGITAL e DVD player s digital audio output e Check the DVD player s audio indicator does setting is not proper output setting For details read appear on display the DVD players operating instructions 94 and remote control unit do not match main unit and remote control unit Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Power turns off Protection circuit activated due Turn off the power wait for the 11 suddenly and to rise of internal temperature set to fully cool down then turn power indicator the power back on flashes red Place the set in a well ventilated 11 place Core
102. components Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly left with left right with right Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables Doing 50 can result in humming or noise Preparations Cables Used for Connections Select the cables according to the equipment being connected Audio cables Coaxial digital connections LI TIT Coaxial digital 75 O ohms pin plug cable Orange Optical digital connections Optical cable BNC digital connections BNC 75 O ohms cable Analog connections stereo Red gt lt Stereo pin plug cable Analog connections monaural for subwoofer Pin plug cable DENON LINK connections DENON LINK cable Speaker connections 5 C Speaker cables Network connections wired LAN ai Ethernet cable Video cables Component video connections Green Blue dl Red Component video cable 75 O ohms cable S Video connections S Video cable Video connections Yellow 75 O ohms pin plug video cable B CB R CR B CB R CR Audio and video cables HDMI connections H Bes 19 HDMI cable Signal direction Audio signal Video signal Output Input Output Input Output Input I
103. declares that this product AVC A1HD is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC in conformity with the following standards EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 and EN50385 The declaration of conformity may be consulted to our European representative DENON Europe UBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLARUNG Hiermit erkl rt D amp M Holdings Inc Denon Brand Company dass sich das Ger t AVC A1HD in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet den folgenden Standards entspricht EN60065 55013 55020 EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 und EN50385 Wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zur Konformitatserklarung an unseren europ ischen Vertreter DENON Europe DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE Par la pr sente D amp M Holdings Inc Denon Brand Company d clare que l appareil AVC ATHD est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE e conforme alle seguenti normative EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 e EN50385 La d claration de conformit pourra tre consult e aupr s de notre repr sentant en Europe DENON Europe DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMIT Con la presente D amp M Holdin
104. for each mode If a new code is preset the previous code is automatically cleared 3 The CD VCR or DVD buttons one only set can be assigned to the TV satellite receiver and cable TV mode t page 68 Punch Through Function EL Display MODE SELECTOR TU DTU Device Device operated Analog tuner USB DAB A G Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection Tuning Channel selection BAND switching _ MODE Switch search modes Switch search modes MEMO Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Buttons A lt gt Cursor _ ENTER Enter Playback Pause RDS search Search Station order selection CH Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 0 9 Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 1 8 1 8 1 8 SHIFT Switch memory block Switch memory block Signal transmission MODE SELECTOR indicator MAIN iPod H MODE SELECTOR Remote ID Net Audio NET DTU J 8 1 Ed BiPod bus 81001 72815 62865 2 82001 72816 62837 3 83001 72817 62838 4 84001 72818 62839 When changing a setting be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVC A1HD s IG page 38 When changing the AMP mode s remote ID also change the iPo
105. higher the bit rate the higher the sound quality but depending on the communication lines and server traffic the music or audio signals being streamed may be Inversely lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted e Server Full or Connection Down is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting e On the AVC A1HD folder and file names can be displayed as titles Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period Recently Played Internet Radio Stations Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from Recently Played in top menu Use AV to select Recently Played then press ENTER or gt Use V to select the item you want to play then press ENTER or gt Up to 20 stations stored in Recently Played Presetting Internet Radio Stations Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing press MEMO 2 Use A V to select Preset then press ENTER Press A G then press 1 8 to select the desired preset number The Internet radio station is now preset If registered at a number that has already been preset the previously registered setting is cleared 2 Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations Press A G then press 1 8 The AVC A1HD automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins
106. mass storage class conforming to mass storage that is copyright protected cannot be played on this set displayed on the or MTP standards is connected class or MTP standards e Set and computer are connected e The set s USB cannot GUI menu The set port and the connected e Connect to the port set at USB 44 by USB cable be used for connection to a port do not match Select computer eA USB memory device that This is nota malfunction DENON Server is The computers or router s e Check the computer s or router s the set cannot recognize is does not guarantee that all USB found or it is firewall is activated firewall settings connected memory devices will operate or not possible to Computer s power is not turned e Turn on the power eCelve power connect to the on USB memory device is connected e Connect the USB memory device _ server Server is not running e Launch the server USB hub directly to the USB port Set s IP address is wrong e Check the set s IP address 35 Files on a USB e USB memory device is in format e Set the format to FAT16 Cannot connect to e Radio station is not currently e Wait a while before trying again memory device other than FAT16 or FAT32 FAT32 For details refer to the preset or favorite broadcasting cannot be played USB memory device s operating radio stations Radio station is not currently in elt is not possible to connect to instruction
107. maximum volume OFF 20dB 10dB Selectable items Power On Level This sets the volume set when the MAIN ZONE s power is turned on Last Selectable items dB 80dB 18dB Mute Level This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute mode is set in the MAIN ZONE Selectable items Full 40dB 200 Source Delete Remove input sources that are not used from the display Selectable items Delete NOTE Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted Input sources set to Delete cannot be selected from GUI menu Source Select or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit Heu GUI related settings Screensaver Make screensaver settings Use the screensaver to prevent burn in on the monitor screen When set to the screensaver is activated if there is no activity for about 3 minutes OFF Selectable items ON Wall Paper Change the GUI background Picture Selectable items Black Gray Format Select the video output signal format to match the monitor PAL NTSC Selectable items When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor is set the picture will not be displayed properly Use the procedure described below to change the video format Operat
108. menu displayed HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x x x x x x x x O O O O x x x O x x x O VIDEO O O O O x x O x x x O S VIDEO x O O O O x x O O x x O S VIDEO O VIDEO O VIDEO O O O O COMPONENT S VIDEO O O O O OFF x O O O x COMPONENT O S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI HDMI O HDMI VIDEO HDMI HDMI S VIDEO HDMI O HDMI S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI O HDMI O COMPONENT x x O HDMI x O O HDMI O COMPONENT x O VIDEO O HDMI x x x HDMI S VIDEO HDMI HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI Signal present Output present X No signal X No output Superimposed over video signal To display the GUI menu monitor output with a resolution of 480p 576p 4 ZONE2 ZONE3 E Input signal Monitor output zi COMPONENT S VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE2 only ZONE2 only VIDEO O VIDEO x O x x O S VIDEO O S VIDEO x O O
109. or DVD recorder for the DVD DEv1 mode Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the DVD DEv2 mode Preset a VCR for the VCR DEv1 mode Preset a tape deck for the VCR bEv2 mode 65 1043409 EL Display MODE SELECTOR H y 2 71 lt E mer gt lt lt gt ei lt lt gt gt I ll _ SOURCE ON SOURCE OFF AV 4 DISPLAY MODE SELECTOR SEARCH Beie Ge CH SHIFT 0 9 DOCERE EL Display MODE SELECTOR Satellite Receiver Cable TV Device Mode Device operated TV HITACHI TV SONY SAT SAT laa kl lt lt gt gt Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through m SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on Power on SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off Power off Buttons MENU Menu guide Menu guide Menu guide Menu guide XY Al S Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor ENTER Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting SETUP Set up Set up Set up Set up DISPLAY Display Display Display Display CH Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels 0 9 10 Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection TV VCR Switch inputs Switch inputs Special Remarks 1 3 0 3 0 83 Special Remarks D Only one component can be preset
110. player e Match the HDMI format of the 12 main remote Surround or HOME THX CINEMA mode and monitor do not match player and monitor control unit s TEST CINEMA mode Picture cannot be source does not match The video conversion function 16 17 button is pressed recorded recorders video connection does not work for the REC DTS sound is DVD player s audio output setting Set the DVD player For details connector video or S Video OUT connectors Match the output is not set to bitstream refer to the DVD player s input source and recorder operating instructions connections DVD E is not compatible Use a DTS compatible player DVDs cannot be e This is not a malfunction Most with DTS sound playback AVC A1HD s Decode Set to the Auto or DTS 43 yen E Aue Eie Mode setting is set to mode copied HDMI audio e The Manual Setup HDMI Set to Amp 31 95 E ED e f2 E o e iPod that is copyright protected cannot be played on this set The file names are not displayed properly 7 7 etc e Characters that cannot be displayed are used e This is not a malfunction this set characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a period displayed
111. radio frequency license ISM band enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States and is compatible with IEEE 802 11b It also uses the 2 4 GHz band but enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate Infrastructure Communications Infrastructure Communications refers to networks using wireless LAN access points This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN via a wireless LAN access point Wireless LAN access points include wireless broadband routers Ad hoc Communications Signaltransferthrough wireless interconnection of computersis referred to as ad hoc communications With such ad hoc communications there is no connection to the Internet Ad hoc communications are suited for establishing simple temporary networks Network Names SSID Security Set Identifier When forming wireless LAN networks groups are formed to prevent interference data theft etc This grouping is done by SSID or Securit
112. remote control unit while watching the GUI menus iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Made for iPod The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation Basic Operation 1 Make the necessary preparations DSet the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod iz amp See the Control Dock for iPod s operating instructions 2 Assign the Control Dock for iPod s input GUI Source Select input source Assign iPod dock 1257 page 42 2 Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press iPod AMP mode to select the input source assigned in step 1 0 above iPod Cr DENON OK to disconnect iPod screen the screens above are not displayed the iPod may not be properly connected Try connecting again GUI Source Select input source Play I page 41 To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the iPod mode IS page 64 Remote Control Unit Operations e With the default settings the iPod can be used connected the VCR iPod connector Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve
113. ro CHF Network Av sunnouNp AVC ATHD E Power operation button 9 Display j ON STANDBY baee e ro s 2 49 Remote contr l SOHBOFascero dra cuanta agrestis 4 D Power indicator eR 52 4 SOURCE SELECT 40 z Power switch amp ON 62 SOURCE button RR 40 5 QUICK SELECT buttons indicators 63 D ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT button 60 78 MASTER VOLUME control knob 52 D VIDEO SELECT button RR 42 Approx 7 m i Master volume indicator RC 1067 The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light With the door open DIRECT STEREO Music URE DIRECT CINEMA i PHONES RESTORER SYSTEM CONTROL GUI DIRECT STEREO 46 Headphones jack PHONES 52 61 CINEMA button 1 RESTORER button MUSIC button NIGHT button MENU button CH SEL ENTER button RETURN button INPUT connectors B ROOM EO button D SETUP MIC jack B DYNAMIC EQ D STATUS button seme DI
114. switches to NET USB and the files in All Music on the media server are played X5 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in Favorites are played Whether All Music or Favorites is selected depends on the Direct Play setting ES page 44 DIRECT PLAY button e Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu Source Select NET USB Playback Mode Direct Play FAVORITES Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites ALL MUSIC Playback starts from the first track registered in the All Music folder When USB is pressed playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device When the media server is stopped or restarted it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites Device operated NET USB iPod Zone selection M 72 23 24 72 23 24 ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection ZONE OFF Power turned off 1 Power turned off 1 ZONE ON Power turned on 1 Power turned on 1 SOURCE SELECT Input source selection X2 Input source selection CHANNEL Preset channel selection VOLUME Adjustment of volume X1 Adjustment of volume 1 MUTE Muting 1 uting X1 MENU Selected menu _ Selected zone menu AM lt File operations _ File operations ENTER File operations
115. wires of two speakers eFirst unplug the power cord 11 touching each other or a core then twist the core wires tightly wire is sticking out of the terminal or terminate the speaker cables and touching the set s rear panel then reconnect activating the protection circuit e Speakers with an impedance Use speakers with the specified 11 other than specified are being impedance used Set is damaged Turn off the power and contact a service center Remote Control Unit Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Set does not work Batteries are worn Replace with new batteries 3 4 properly when e You are operating outside of the e Operate within the specified 4 remote control specified range range unit operated Obstacle between main unit and e Remove the obstacle remote control unit e The batteries are not inserted eInsert the batteries the 3 4 the proper direction as indicated proper direction following the by the polarity marks in the polarity marks in the battery battery compartment compartment e The set s remote control sensor e Move the set to a place in which 4 is exposed to strong light direct the remote control sensor will sunlight inverter type fluorescent not be exposed to strong light bulb light etc The remote ID of the main unit Set the same remote IDs for the 38 67 72 Audio signals are
116. x x x x x x x x x x x OFF OFF OFF x DOLBY PRO LOGIC Cinema x 3 3 048 OFF O OFF O DOLBY PRO LOGICI Cinema x x x x x OFF 3 3 048 OFF OFF OFF DTS 6 Cinema 0 3 048 DOLBY DIGITAL x x 0 dB OFF O OFF O OFF DTS SURROUND x x x 0 dB O OFF O OFF O OFF 7 5 x x x 0 dB O OFF O OFF OFF 8 SUPER STADIUM x x O Medium O 10 x x x x x x x O NOTE3 O OFF O O OFF Medium O 10 x x x NOTE4 OFF OFF OFF JAZZ CLUB x x O 10 x x x x x x x 048 O OFF OFF OFF O E CLASSIC CONCERT x x Medium O 10 x x x x x ps 048 OFF OFF OFF O 5 Medium O 10 0 dB O OFF O OFF O OFF O S VIDEO GAME x x O Medium 10 x x x 0 dB OFF OFF OFF 8 30 ms x O 0 dB O OFF O OFF O OFF O DOLBY HEADPHONE x x x x x x 0 dB OFF O OFF O OFF O Signal Adjustable X No signal Not adjustable BASS 6 dB TREBLE 0 dB
117. 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 661 037 054 164 163 009 009 037 865 773 171 017 009 037 327 037 009 264 487 217 877 054 000 982 156 009 035 761 051 009 030 051 009 009 054 037 817 443 876 712 455 556 264 030 037 163 480 070 346 606 037 0487 0217 11298 0820 11517 0145 11909 0610 0051 0036 0815 0264 0208 0264 0264 0156 10821 0499 10817 10037 0109 0361 0037 0394 0037 0218 0218 0208 0548 0163 0361 0264 10178 10370 10418 10610 10714 10218 11163 10264 0163 10200 0512 0217 10218 0455 10486 0218 10371 0455 0264 10371 10346 10361 10610 0195 10208 10480 10548 0374 10236 10092 10817 11933 10226 10817 10817 10145 10009 0264 10556 10698 11011 10556 10634 JVC Kaige Kaisui Kambrook Kamp Kangli Kangyi Kapsch Karcher Kathrein Kawa Kawasho KB Aristocrat KDS KEC Kendo Kennedy Kennex Kenwood Khind KIC Kiota Kioto Kiton KLH KLL Kloss Kneissel Kolin Kolster Kongque Konichi Konig Konka Kontakt Korpel Korting Kosmos Koyoda Kreisen KTV Kuaile Kulun Kunlun 054 10030 371 650 253 10009 009 455 10217 10 10 10 10 01
118. 0 30838 Lexia 30699 30768 LG Lifetec Limit LiteOn Lodos Loewe Logik Logix Luker Lumatron Lunatron Luxman Luxor agnasonic agnat Magnavox agnex Majestic anhattan Marantz ark Marquant atsui Maxdorf axent Maxim aya MBO cIntosh MDS ecotek edion H etronic etz ico icromaxx icromedia icromega icrosoft icrostar inato inax inerva inoka intek irror 30591 30741 30790 30869 31906 30651 30831 31347 30768 31104 31058 31158 30713 30539 30511 30741 30885 30713 30884 30705 30783 31367 30695 30705 30713 30741 30833 31115 31321 31832 30741 30573 30713 31004 31695 31730 30651 30675 31923 30503 30539 30646 30675 30713 30821 30885 31140 31268 30723 31345 30705 30713 30503 30539 30675 30713 30770 30672 30651 30695 30713 30884 31004 31695 31730 30788 31347 30713 30872 31367 31345 30690 30730 31730 31533 30713 30770 30651 30630 30774 30783 30831 31006 31270 31345 31347 31423 30790 30690 30695 30831 31270 30690 30525 30571 30713 30723 30751 31223 31695 30503 30539 30539 31005 30522 31708 30831 30752 30713 30705 30770 31115 30839 30717 30752 Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka MPX Mustek Mx Onda Mystral NAD Naiko Narita NEC Neovia Nesa Neufunk Nevir NexxTech Nikkai Nintaus Niro Norcent Nordmende Noriko Nova Nowa Nu Tec Okano Olidata
119. 0009 0035 0093 0264 10009 10817 0145 10054 10030 0650 0393 0092 0145 0093 0009 0009 0037 0178 0556 0009 0163 0145 10327 0037 0370 0047 0037 0037 0587 0036 1037 10556 10374 10714 1904 0668 0371 0218 10037 10180 0163 10455 0817 0817 11917 0009 10418 0556 1556 0054 0156 0053 0166 10001 10036 10264 11037 0264 10208 10093 10009 10653 10009 0236 10264 0037 10037 0093 10361 0361 10486 11191 11137 10648 10361 10217 10178 0017 0051 0178 0035 10208 11163 10610 10226 10180 10036 10668 10264 10009 10817 10374 10195 10030 10648 10455 0037 0362 0346 0030 1904 10264 10053 10200 10443 10200 10715 10548 1037 0556 0352 0163 0154 0093 0030 0036 0217 10487 0362 Simpson Singer Sinotec Sinudyne Skantic SKY Sky Brazil Sky North Skygiant Skyworth Sliding SLX Smaragd Soemtron Solar Drape Solavox Sole Sonawa Songba Soniko Sonitron Sonneclair Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound amp Vision Soundesign Soundwave Sova Sowa Soyea Spectra Spectravision Spectroniq Squareview SR2000 Ssangyong SSS Staksonic Standard Standard Components Starlite Stenway Stern Stevison Strato
120. 009 10335 10053 10195 10443 11037 10171 10264 10217 10163 10548 PRESET CODE 10217 10218 10362 02 00 0264 0171 0037 8 7 4 0171 0217 0009 0009 0264 0217 0109 0817 0817 0374 0037 0287 0548 0037 0000 10463 10150 0030 10073 0264 1208 10361 10548 10154 10451 0463 10180 10150 11944 11911 10668 10623 0036 10371 10370 10195 10170 11944 0163 10820 0264 10370 0217 0208 10346 10361 10073 10109 10335 10343 10560 10625 10163 10217 0361 10371 10512 Finlux Firstar Firstline Fisher Flint Force Formenti Fortress Fraba Friac Frontech Fujimaro Fujitsu Fujitsu General Fujitsu Siemens Funai Furi Furichi Futronic Futuretech Galaxi Galaxis Ganxin Gateway GBC GE GEC Geloso Gemini General General Technic Genesis Genexxa Gericom Gevalt Giant Gibralter Go Video Go Vision Goldfunk GoldStar 0037 0346 0714 0236 0009 0361 07 6 9 1 4 1363 0047 0036 0 7 0 9 037 0037 061 114 0037 0093 0037 0009 0610 0009 0865 0009 0809 0009 0808 0000 0668 0145 0860 0264 0180 0037 0037 0817 1755 0009 1447 0051 0060 1922 0625 0037 0009 0047 0109 0009 0009 0009 0808 1298 1371 0009
121. 01412 Action 10030 10650 Skyision 01334 01413 Multichoice 01333 01559 01560 nome 10009 SL 00299 0 Zenith 00856 01856 MySk 01693 01848 01850 SM Electronic 0073 0 m 01409 onna 00455 00743 0161 Zeta Technology 00200 N NEOTION 01334 Addison 10022 10108 10053 E E opfield 01206 01208 01545 01783 alae JET SE ADL 11217 Smart 01222 0140401413 00749 01749 00790 00819 10047 10054 10017 10051 01630 Toshiba 00455 01285 01501 01516 Opentel 01412 Admiral 10093 10463 10180 10163 Tm 00639 01639 00455 00847 Dm TTE 10264 10418 00853 01524 01558 01640 e 00820 0123 01307 Satellite Receiver 8 mem 10761 10783 10815 10817 Star 00887 00200 00713 00685 1113 PVR Combinati P Pace 01175 01356 01423 01850 ven 10842 10876 11933 n 00713 01113 ombination 1 i i Star Choice 00869 Tax 01227 01251 01291 01296 Panasonic 01304 Adventuri 10000 Star Trak 00772 00869 01626 X1 Philips 01142 00099 01442 Adyson 10217 Starland 00713 rio 01075 sat 01300 Pilotime 01339 AEG 11163 11556 Starlite 00200 TT micro 01429 Allvision 01412 Proscan 00392 Agashi 10217 10264 Stream 01847 01848 urnsat 00713 Amstrad 01175 R Radix 01317 Agna 10150 00125 00713 00820 00853 winner 00713 01611 Atsat 01300 RCA 01392 10092 10009 10035 10037 Strong 00678 0 159 01284 01300 uer 00879 01162 01333 0135 01412 Em Num Aiko 10217 0264 10361 10371 Su
122. 01414 00299 00713 01043 01284 01284 01075 00299 00345 00873 00818 01557 00724 00722 00710 00713 00455 00710 01083 00200 00173 00713 01530 00394 00173 00710 01284 01743 01075 01334 01685 00869 01225 00853 01206 00853 00299 00713 01043 01075 01232 01334 01412 01626 007 00200 00724 3 00818 01283 01334 007 3 01375 01704 00173 018 007 007 007 00299 01075 007 1 3 3 3 8 00749 00455 00200 00713 01232 01412 00869 00856 01473 01214 01695 Multibroadcast Multichoice Mx Onda Myryad Mysat MySky NEC NEOTION Netgem Netsat Neuf TV Neuhaus Neuling Neusat Nevir Next Level Nikko Noda Electronic Nokia Nordmende OctalTV Okano Omega Opentel Optex Optimus Optus Orbis Orbitech Origo OSAT P Sat Pace Pacific Packard Bell Packsat Palcom Panarex Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat peeKTon 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ec 00 00 00 00 00 642 00879 642 00879 01333 01433 559 01560 659 200 713 693 01848 01850 519 334 322 099 00887 322 713 232 713 659 869 200 00713 00723 704 455 00723 00751 00853 873 01023 01223 01723 455 01611 505 442 887 232 01412 394 00713 01043 01283 611 724 879 232 01334 01412 099 01100 497 345 232
123. 02 dB IHF A weighted DIRECT mode Distortion 0 005 20 Hz 20 kHz DIRECT mode Rated output 12V Digital D A output Rated output 2 V at 0 dB playback Total harmonic distortion 0 005 96 1 kHz at O dB Dynamic range 110 dB Digital input Format Digital audio interface e Phono equalizer PHONO input REC OUT 5 Input sensitivity 2 5 mV 2 RIAA deviation x1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz m S N 74 A weighting with 5 mV input z Rated output 150 mV s Distortion factor 0 03 1 kHz 3 V 97 Video section Standard video connectors Input output level and impedance Frequency response S Video connectors Input output level and impedance Frequency response Color component video connector Input output level and impedance Frequency response J Wireless LAN Network type wireless LAN standards Transfer rate Security Used frequency range No of channels _ General Power supply Power consumption Maximum external dimensions Weight 1 Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 QO ohms C color signal 0 3 PAL 0 286 NTSC Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 QO ohms signal 0 7 Vp p 75 O ohms PR signal 0 7 Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 100 MHz 0 3 dB when vid
124. 0374 11080 10264 10145 10511 10037 10587 10009 10037 10037 10706 10009 10371 10698 10820 10860 10037 10037 10872 10820 10037 10880 10009 10037 10217 10587 10780 10872 10668 10394 10009 10009 11164 10698 10009 10037 10217 10343 10394 11037 11137 10717 10017 10217 10463 11034 10037 10093 10217 10037 0661 0208 10548 0217 0208 1178 0668 1704 0820 11556 0180 10178 0180 10178 1463 0714 10009 10036 10037 10178 10634 10860 11755 10556 10218 10108 10037 10715 10092 10374 10672 10352 10070 10171 PRESET CODE Easy Living Eaton Ecco ECE Edison Minerva Elbe Elcit Electroband Electrograph Electrohome Elekta Elfunk ELG Elin Elite Elta Emerald Emerson Envision Enzer Erae Erres ESA ESC Ether Etron Eurofeel Euroman Europa Europhon Evesham Technology Evolution Expert Exquisit Feilang Feilu Feiyan Feiyue Fenner Fer0 Ferguson Fidelity Filsai Finlandia 11248 10060 10773 10037 10487 10037 10610 10163 10000 11755 10154 10178 10009 11037 10037 10009 10037 10009 10178 10047 10236 10178 11909 10486 10361 10070 10030 10860 11371 10037 10812 10037 10030 10001 10217 10037 10037 10037 11248 11756 10163 10037 10009 10009 10264 10009 10
125. 067 20041 20320 21972 20209 20048 20081 20000 20104 20041 20046 20106 20209 20278 20315 20348 20035 20162 20104 20226 20642 20222 21062 20035 20162 20037 20048 20047 20240 20000 20104 20432 21162 21262 20184 20240 20000 20104 20121 20209 20002 20278 20348 20352 20479 20742 21479 20000 20037 20000 20209 20081 20352 0000 20348 20642 20742 21972 0037 20209 20041 20348 20000 20642 20035 21062 20035 20162 20000 20225 20226 20614 20616 20836 21035 21162 21262 21562 20043 20041 20035 20162 20037 20047 20081 20240 20000 20042 20067 20038 21035 21237 20042 20000 20209 20035 20081 20000 20209 20038 20226 20479 Philips Phoenix Phonola Pilot Pioneer Polk Audio Portland Presidian Prinz Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosco Prosonic Protec Protech ProVision Pulsar Pulser Pye Qisheng Quarter Quartz Quasar Quelle Radialva Radiola Radionette RadioShack Radix Randex Rank Rank Arena RCA Realistic Reoc ReplayTV Rex Ricavision Rio Roadstar Runco Saba Saisho Salora 20035 20162 20048 20081 20045 20000 20209 20226 20616 20618 20739 21081 21181 20278 20081 20037 20162 20081 20042 20067 20081 20278 20637 21593 20000 20081 20240 20000 20278 20320 20642 20060 21060 20278 20209 20278 20000 20081 20278 20039 20240 202
126. 0681 40000 40029 40157 Birmingham Cable 0076 e Kenwood 40028 40037 40036 40190 SAE 40157 Communications Panasonic 00000 00008 00144 01488 ony 01006 org Saisho 40000 British Telecom 00003 Paragon 00000 00008 00525 Supercable 00276 C Cable amp Wireless 01068 Penney 00000 T Time Warner cable 01877 Red Sangu Century 00008 Philips 01305 00317 00817 Z Zenith 00899 L m 2 sone 1000 40087 40179 Coship 01462 panam 01877 00877 00144 00533 SS s Daehan 00778 x dE Pulsar 00000 CD Player LXI 40179 Sharp 40037 Daeryung 01877 00877 00477 00008 1 Digeo GE Visual 00003 Acoustic Research 40420 M Magnavox 40157 Siemens 40157 su Advantage 40032 Marantz 40029 40157 Silsonic 40036 Director 00476 Quasar 00000 emm m VETT mm Simaudio DX Antenna 01500 R RadioShack 00303 HEN E Emerson 00303 Regal 10276 40157 40029 Sonic Frontiers 40157 Audio Research 40157 M 40000 40032 40179 40420 Son 40490 40000 40100 41364 Encon 00008 Runco 00000 AMET RES emorex 40468 40185 Fosgate 00276 S Sagem 00817 Animas 40157 Meridian 40157 Sugden 40157 Foxtel 01222 Salora 00000 TUE 20157 Micromega 40157 Sylvania 40157 France Telecom 00817 Samsun 00003 00000 00144 00778 40000 T TAG McLaren 40157 g 00840 01060 01666 40157 Freebox 01482 Mission 40157 Tandy 40032 e Scientific Atlant 01877 00877 00477 00237 B Balanced
127. 0741 30790 w 30571 30717 30675 30741 30759 30768 30790 30833 31006 31197 31227 30898 31367 31695 0490 30703 31905 30770 30831 31115 31695 31115 30730 31051 31115 30713 31530 30690 30768 31004 31228 w 30789 30790 30833 31483 31832 31923 30713 30768 30651 30690 30770 30651 30798 30768 30833 30898 31036 31227 31347 31382 31483 31730 31923 3057 30522 30511 30551 31503 30784 30665 30788 30790 30898 30789 31224 30503 30573 30539 30695 31045 31154 31503 31510 31769 30831 30872 31321 31327 30730 DVD Recorder 1 Tredex TruVision Tsinghua Tongfang TSM Umax Unimax United Universum Uptek upXus Urban Concepts US Logic Venturer Vestel Victor Vieta Viewmaster Voxson Vtrek Waitec Walkvision Waltham Welkin Wellington Weltstar Wesder Wharfedale Wilson Windsor Windy Sam WIZE Woxter Xbox Xenius XLogic XMS Xoro Yakumo Yamada Yamaha Yamakawa Yukai Zenith Zeus Akus 30843 31451 31205 31224 30690 31151 30770 30675 30695 30699 30713 30730 30788 30884 31115 31152 31228 31367 31832 30591 30713 30741 30790 30869 31227 31530 31913 30763 31345 30503 30539 30839 30790 30713 30884 31530 31597 30705 30862 31224 30690 30730 30774 30831 31228 31151 31224 31233 30717 31530 30831 30713 30713 30699 30686 30751 3
128. 0752 30790 31832 30831 31233 30713 30573 31115 31005 31151 31224 30522 31708 30790 30768 31152 31228 30770 30788 31183 31250 31004 31056 31158 31354 30665 30872 31104 30730 31730 31906 30784 31158 30872 31004 31056 31151 30490 30539 30646 30545 30503 30591 30741 30869 Airis Akira Alba Apex Digital Aristona Aspire Digital Belson Cat cello Centrum Classic Coby Commax Conia CyberHome Cytron Denon Denver Digitrex DSE Durabrand E max Ellion Eltax Emerson Ferguson Firstline Funai Gateway Go Video Goodmans GPX Grundig H amp B Humax iLo JVC Kansas Technologies Kreisen KXD LG Lifetec LiteOn Loewe Lumatron Luxor Magnavox Matsui Maxent MBO Medion 31321 31321 31530 31056 30646 31168 31086 31421 31730 31227 31730 31086 31321 31321 31129 31502 31347 30490 31056 31056 31730 31502 31321 31421 31321 30675 31730 31530 30675 31158 30741 31158 31730 31530 31730 30741 31730 31421 30646 31348 31164 31597 31530 31421 31321 30741 31347 31158 30741 31321 31730 30646 30675 31730 31347 31730 31347 30751 2 lt c Mitsubishi ustek NEC Oopla Palsonic Panasonic Philips Pioneer Polaroid ProVision Pye RCA Relisys Roadstar Sampo Samsung ScanMagic Schneider SEG Sensory Science Sharp Sony Star Clusters Sylvania Tangent Targa Teac Techwood Tevion Thomson Toshiba
129. 1 10009 Prima 10815 10817 Princeton 10700 Prinston 11037 Prinz 1036 Prism 10250 10051 PRESET CODE 10821 10156 10178 10037 1260 1556 0764 1276 1523 0374 0698 0717 10156 10030 11480 10853 10367 10163 10009 10508 10463 10145 10163 10017 10030 11756 10512 10200 0370 10178 10037 0287 0512 10486 0714 10715 11316 10264 10783 1269 11933 10250 11947 11310 10650 10361 10108 10208 10698 10250 10030 10070 10180 11661 10370 10000 10171 11254 10374 10108 10030 10109 10361 10679 Profex Profi Profilo Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosco Prosonic Protec Protech Proton Proview ProVision Pulsar Pulser Pvision Pye Pymi Qingdao Quadral Quartz Quasar Quelle Questa Questar R Line Rabbit Radialva Radiola Radiomarelli RadioShack Radiotone Rank Rank Arena RBM RCA Realistic Recor Rectiligne Rediffusion Redstar Reflex Relisys 0009 0009 1556 0037 0037 1037 1447 0156 0037 0374 0009 0009 0418 0178 1498 0037 0017 0178 0876 0037 0009 0051 0817 0051 0150 0250 0650 0011 0109 0361 0036 0036 0037 0047 0163 0037 10163 0092 10092 1191 0218 10178 0865 0218 0602 10163 10668 10876
130. 10327 10037 10499 10715 10009 10037 10180 10109 10625 10037 10037 10217 10178 10236 11938 10264 10163 10218 11900 10714 10614 10371 10218 10037 10009 10748 10030 10218 10017 10036 10030 10264 10610 0037 10037 10074 10051 10374 10009 10264 10009 0714 0362 0030 0463 11556 10698 10556 10361 210217 10036 10817 0455 10170 10037 10218 10217 10163 10001 10661 10374 10817 10817 0287 0418 0178 0668 10037 10819 10195 10200 10455 10487 10668 10714 11191 11363 0335 10560 0486 10668 10180 11911 11037 10778 10668 10661 10487 10374 10335 10264 10208 10163 10009 10030 10092 11037 10070 10820 10821 10370 10418 10009 10264 10817 10817 Changhong Chengdu Ching Tai Chun Yun Chunfeng Chung Hsin Chunsun Cimline Cinema Cineral Cinex Citek Citizen City Clarion Clarivox Classic Clatronic Clayton CMS Hightec Colortyme Commercial Solutions Concorde Condor Conia Conic Conrac Conrowa Contec Continental Edison Cosmel Craig Crosley Crown Crown Mustang CS Electronics CTX Curtis Mathes CXC Cybertron Cytronix D D Vision 11298 0037 10092 10030 10047 10821 10037 10171 11347 105
131. 196 0037 10346 10548 10195 10714 0820 1911 0218 0556 0698 0361 0264 1331 0780 10371 10093 10030 0463 10556 10218 10037 0226 0556 10200 10418 10217 1269 10217 10361 10606 10287 10548 10370 11610 10872 10433 10180 10166 10180 10037 10714 10264 10108 10343 10714 10217 10556 10218 10773 1904 10264 PRESET CODE 10054 10000 10051 10236 11946 11941 Panasonic 11231511 2117 10548 10508 10226 10208 10037 10035 Panavision 10037 10051 10706 Panda 10226 10264 10780 10817 Pathe Cinema 10163 Pathe Marconi 10109 Pausa 10009 Paxonic 10060 10030 PCE 10156 10060 10047 10000 10051 10060 EE 10035 10036 10108 11347 Perdio 10037 10163 Perfekt 10037 Petters 11523 10054 10451 10178 10030 10037 10074 10418 Philharmonic 10217 11454 10054 10051 10178 m 10092 11961 ols 10690 10556 10361 10343 10037 10009 Phocus 10714 Phoenix 10037 10163 Phonola 10037 10556 10051 10060 10706 10011 10166 10011 10163 10170 Pioneer 10370 10486 10760 10866 Pionier 10370 10486 Plantron 10009 10037 Playsonic 10037 10217 JI 10009 Portland 10451 10092 Powerpoint 10037 10487 Prandoni Prince 1036 Precision 10236 10180 Premier 10009 10264 President 10860 1076
132. 2 20348 20348 20037 20000 20067 20041 20278 20637 20642 21593 20035 20162 20037 20081 20000 20226 21162 20348 20352 20035 20037 20048 20041 20038 20037 20209 20348 20642 20035 20037 20000 20041 20240 20209 20041 20278 20320 20642 20226 20037 20000 20278 20037 20000 20278 20209 20348 20479 20642 20278 20000 20002 20060 20067 20041 20278 20320 20037 20104 20041 20320 20278 20618 20636 20739 21996 20240 20000 TNIX Tocom Tokai Topline Toshiba Tosonic Totevision Touch Toyoda Tradex Triad Trix Uher Ultra Ultravox Unitech United Universum Vector Vector Research Victor Video Concepts Video Technic Videomagic Videosonic Viewsonic Villain Voodoo Wards Watson Weltblick Wharfedale White Westinghouse World XR 1000 Yamaha Yamishi Yoko Zenith ZT Group ZX 20037 20240 20037 20104 20041 20348 20081 20240 20045 20000 20042 20067 20043 20209 20041 20352 20432 20742 20845 21008 21145 21972 21996 20278 20037 20240 21972 20278 20081 20278 20037 20240 20045 20278 20278 20240 20348 20742 21593 20037 20081 20240 20000 20104 20208 20106 20348 21137 20045 20184 20038 20067 20041 20045 20000 20037 20240 20000 21972 20000 21972 20060 20035 20037 20048 20039 20047 20081 20033 20240 20045 20000 20042 20043 20041 20038 20046 20479 200
133. 2 E 7 2 3 AN amplifier Power 9 or Y wis ZONE audio sf Sp 5 output _ZONE2 digital output uo ZONE2 video output DVD player AVC A1HD MIT M 81 ZONES video output gt P SB R Remote Ea 5 SB control unit ZONE4 digital output 2 audio output Multi zone video cable Multi zone audio cable e When only using one speaker ZONE2 ZONES set Mono In this case the ZONE2 ZONE3 monaural output is output from the ZONE2 ZONE3 pre out L and R connectors so connect as desired e Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and T SOURCE SELECT lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT VOLUME J Uer lt ZONE2 ON OFF gt lt ZONE3 ON OFF gt lt ZONE4 0N 0FF gt Main remote control unit Mutizone Le SI ZONE SELECTI indicator ON KAL SOURCE SELECT 0009 x H vou rs MENI Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations lt gt Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit Multi Zone Operations Turning the Power On and Off Turning off the Sound T
134. 20352 irror 11900 Luker 31367 20002 20278 20479 20637 Naik 7 Internal 11909 E Emerson 21278 21479 Schneider 20081 20000 mm mm M Tm mes J Jvc 11923 F Ferguson 20000 20278 Sears 20037 20000 21237 P NE 11941 Vemm 30713 30884 L is Ge SC Philips 11454 10556 11961 Maxim 3 367 Lloyd s 11904 Firstline 20278 Sharp 20037 20048 20807 3 x mm 10608 Naik 81867 M Magnavox 10054 11904 Funai 20000 Shivaki 20037 een ape Memorex 10250 G GE 20060 20035 20048 20240 Siemens 20081 rima arita e itsubishi 3 Sinud 20352 R RCA 11948 11958 Neovia 31271 De GoldStar 20037 20480 21237 a 0 Orion 10463 1191 Sony 20032 20000 21232 Roadstar 11900 0 Orion 30695 Palsonic 11904 Goodmans 20278 20352 20637 mes 20248 S 11982 P Pacific 30695 2 Grandin 20278 20742 10250 1005 20081 21781 11903 Panasonic 31490 10051 Grundig 20081 20347 20352 20742 Symphonic 20000 Schneider 11982 Philips 30539 30854 31260 om y 20352 SEG 11037 RCA 31022 PES 1003710556 Harley Davidson 20000 20992 e e Quasar 10250 1005 n Teac 20037 20000 20637 20642 Sova 11952 S 31367 20352 a R Radiola 10556 emm Technics 20081 Stevison 11982 Samsung 30899 Hitachi 20000 1 Sylvania 10171 Sansui 30695 Hypson 20037 SE y m 10047 10051 10093 11917 yp Telefunken 20278 T Teac 10698
135. 2ch Bi Amp 2ch L R Bi Amp connection Bi Amp SRB SEB FL FR Bi Amp KEEN FL SR A SL A SBR SBL H H E EROR eo connection Aan BRING 2ch L R Bi Wiring connection FR FL Bi Wiring SBR SBL SR B SL B FL FR Bi Wiring connection 74 Setting 6 With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes 9 1 channel playback Miulti zone playback Setting D with this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes 7 1 channel playback Miulti zone playback e 5 1 channel playback ZONE2 stereo playback with bi wiring connections e 5 1 playback ZONE2 monaural playback monaural playback with bi wiring connections Switching ZONE2 ON OFF button Z0NE3 ON OFF button 7 1 channel playback ZONE2 or stereo playback 7 1 channel playback ZONE2 monaural playback monaural playback Switching ZONE2 ON OFF button ZONE3 ON OFF button MAIN ZONE MAIN ZONE Amp Assi MAIN ZONE N Amp Assign F SW FR ES ZONES EE ZONE2 ZONES mode Zem Z3R 22 a 7 za 228 2 1 7 2 amp 3 ZONE2 Bi amp ZONE2 ZONE2 amp 3 POWER Tic
136. 3 30774 30783 30788 30790 30831 30869 31367 30752 30768 30672 30651 31005 31036 31233 31423 31224 31451 30872 30884 31483 31530 31158 30672 31256 32015 32024 31117 30717 30741 30770 30717 30533 30839 31382 31005 31224 31224 30788 30898 30831 30898 31152 30885 30690 30751 30768 30672 30539 30713 30730 30768 30898 31115 30784 30690 30730 30768 31152 30705 30713 30755 30831 30573 30715 30783 30869 31099 30533 31533 30864 30573 30630 30772 31033 31070 31431 31433 31536 31633 31769 31981 32043 31233 30768 30798 30665 30713 30763 30630 30675 30713 30752 Soundmax Soundwave Spectra Standard Star Clusters Starlogic Starmedia Stevison Strong Sunkai Sunstech Sunwood Superscan Supervision SVA Sylvania Symphonic Synn andberg angent arga atung chibo CL CM eac ec echnica echnics echnika echnisson echnosonic echwood edelex elefunken eletech ensai evion heta Digital homson ivo okai om Tec op Suxess oshiba RANS continents ransonic 30768 30783 30872 30651 30768 30788 30831 30898 31152 31227 31005 31005 31224 31367 30713 30770 30850 30831 30788 30898 30821 30768 31152 30672 30717 30752 31105 30630 30675 30821 31268 0675 30821 31268 30768 30713 31695 31321 31227 30770 31695 30741 31180 3
137. 36 10885 11755 10264 11037 10885 10860 10463 11909 10463 1755 10163 0217 0017 0051 0060 1347 0195 0163 10714 11756 11037 10650 11330 1756 0418 0418 0154 0093 0178 1156 0001 0218 1037 10889 11556 10037 10180 World of Vision Worldview X XView Xenius Xiahua Xianghai Xiangyang Xiangyu Xihu Xingfu Xinghai XLogic Xoceco Xoro XR 1000 Xrypton Y Yamaha Yamishi Yapshe Yingge Yokan Yoko Yonggu Yorx Youlanasi Yousida Yuhang Z Zanussi Zenith ZhuHai 10865 10877 10880 11217 11 298 10455 11 191 10634 10009 10817 10009 10264 10009 10264 10009 10264 10698 11 11 064 196 10154 10037 10030 10037 10250 10009 10 10 10 037 10009 10264 009 10030 817 10009 10 009 10163 10 11 047 463 030 092 911 10009 10661 10264 10698 10773 0817 0860 1217 0180 10171 0650 11576 0217 10218 10455 0037 10217 10218 0370 0718 10217 10264 10017 10000 10093 11265 10812 10178 11145 10145 10171 10037 11904 11909 10374 TV DVD Combination 2 x4 X2 A Advent Akai Akura Alba Amstrad Apex Digital Audiovox Axion B Black Diamond Bush C Centrum Crown D D Vision Denver 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 933 675 9
138. 43 When the AVC A1HD and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable if the monitor is not compatible with audio signal playback only the video signals are output to the monitor The audio signals input from the analog digital and EXT IN connectors are not output to the monitor This cannot be set for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned 41 peuejs m o 5 9 E a xoeqAeld 23 3 E o E 3 euoz niniN uomneunojuj ones Digital Select digital input connector to assign to this source Input source DVD HDP TV CBL TUNER CD SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items Coaxiall 4 5 DENONLINK BNC1 2 None When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected be sure to make a setting to DENON LINK Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR Default setting Coaxial 1 Coaxial 2 Optical 1 Coaxial 3 Optical 4 Input source DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX TUNER CD Default setting Optical 2 Optical 3 Optical 5 None Coaxial 4 e This cannot be set for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned When DENON LINK is assigned at the GUI menu Assign setting the PCM signals network audio signals Internet radio media server and USB input fro
139. 517 EE Wewa 00455 eeng 01680 x3 iemens 00173 01334 01429 ughes Networ 01142 01442 Hughes Network Silva 00299 eleka 00262 00442 aw Systems H systems 20739 Gm 00718 Sen 01099 01100 01251 01334 inbox 1801 Humax 01176 01427 01675 Philips 20739 1 Wintel 00299 SKR 00713 01610 01626 Huth 01075 S Samsung 20739 00856 00099 00847 00887 GE M 00173 00293 00455 Hyundai 01075 01159 SKY 01014 01175 01662 01693 eleves 00455 01214 01300 01334 Worldsat K Kan 01300 01847 0 848 01850 elevisa 00887 X Marg 00123 athrein 00249 00658 01221 01561 Television SKY Italia 00853 01693 01847 01848 felewire 01232 888 10264 Sky Television 01014 i 00713 01409 01622 01672 SS 01075 L le gt 1 evion j mem 00123 00713 00847 01214 M Maximum 01334 Mark 10047 10054 10009 Sky XL 01251 01412 00392 00566 00455 00710 01323 Mediacom 01206 Syst 10037 10352 10374 10455 Sky 01175 Thomson MAS LANE 00858 Xtreme 01300 10556 01046 01175 01291 01534 Medi 01412 Sk 00713 01075 01085 01200 01543 01662 Y Yakumo inais 10009 10037 ymaster 01334 01409 01567 01611 Microstar 01075 horn 00455 01718 Accuscan 10047 Skymax 00200 Morgans 01412 10001 Skyplus 01232 01334 01412 01672 Yes 00887 Motorola 00869 Bis 003 ioko 00394 00394 00504 00818 01075 WES Acoustic Research 11269 y at 01742 01442 Z Zehnder 01232 01251 01334
140. 56 10070 10499 0217 10371 10037 10370 10054 10037 10145 11156 10009 10287 10009 0180 0054 10000 10171 1 0074 10180 10208 10487 10714 0054 0451 0702 0166 10009 10783 10821 10092 10036 10451 10030 10035 10418 11498 10009 11170 10036 10487 10180 10163 10053 10370 10606 10715 10154 10093 10178 10037 11982 0017 0264 0108 10463 10171 0714 10264 10037 0370 1037 10264 0817 11008 0009 0218 0060 0370 0030 0009 0418 0672 0000 0180 0030 0035 Daewoo Dainichi Dansai Dantax Datsura Dawa Daytek Dayton Daytron Dayu De Graaf Decca Degraff Deitron Dell Denko Denon Denver Desmet Diamant Diamond Digatron Digiline Digital Life Digitex Digitor Digix Media Dixi DL Domeos Domland Dongda Donghai Dream Vision DSE DTS Dual Dual Tec Dumont Durabrand Dux Dwin Dynatech Dynatron 10154 10030 10661 10865 11756 10499 10217 10037 10218 10009 10035 10208 10217 10370 10486 10208 10009 10672 10092 10180 0451 0092 0672 0876 1909 0374 0170 0036 10180 11661 10700 10880 10623 10764 10109 10009 10036 0037 1207 0009 11207 0178 10030 10374 10163 10037 10163 1
141. 662 01847 01175 01662 01296 01645 01672 01743 01622 01339 01853 01567 00710 01085 01334 01626 00394 00818 01075 01232 01366 01412 01413 Coship Crossdigital Crown Cryptovision Cyfra Cyrus D box Daewoo Delfa Deltasat Dgtec Digenius Digiality Digifusion DigiLogic DigiQuest DigiSat Digisky DigitAll World Digiturk Digiwave Dijam DiPro DirecTV Discovery Dish Network System Dishpro Distratel DMT DNT Dream Multimedia DSE DSTV Durabrand DX Antenna Echostar Einhell Elap Elsat Elta Emme Esse Energy Sistem Engel EP Sat Esat Eurieult 01457 01109 01284 00455 00795 01076 00200 00723 00873 01114 00713 01111 01296 01743 00863 01075 01542 01631 01242 00299 01685 01645 01743 01284 00863 01300 01457 01473 01232 01457 01227 01076 01631 01296 01367 01543 01377 00392 00566 00639 01639 01142 00247 00749 01749 00724 00819 01856 01076 01108 00099 01109 01414 01442 01609 01392 01640 00710 01505 01005 00775 01775 01505 01005 00775 01775 01283 01704 01075 00200 01237 01375 00642 00879 01433 01284 01530 01505 01005 00775 00455 00610 00713 00853 00871 01086 01200 01323 01409 01418 01473 01775 00713 00713 01567 00713 00200 01659 00871 01631 00713 01251 00455 00879 00882 Eurocrypt EuroLine Euro
142. 7 10001 10661 009 10163 264 714 10556 10 371 10030 10 11 10 10 163 498 180 10037 10648 163 10668 10 180 10706 10217 10001 706 10037 156 10 10 11 962 10037 10 10 10 10 030 10037 10499 180 108 10037 009 10009 10 10 037 10180 10418 10817 487 10037 10 370 10037 10009 10876 10463 10009 10009 10051 10374 1923 0817 0764 0361 0060 0362 1037 1037 0030 0556 0668 1331 0718 1084 10180 10264 10208 10661 0093 0070 0418 0653 0764 0037 0180 0009 0370 0778 0371 0180 0362 0556 0150 0264 0037 0587 0817 10217 11556 10370 0455 0610 10817 10463 10036 10508 10683 10217 0264 10606 10765 0370 10053 0218 0641 10030 10217 10226 10817 10264 10053 10218 10606 10731 10218 10374 10610 10610 10767 10374 10036 10371 10714 Kyoshu Kyoto L amp S Electronic Lark LaSAT Lavis Leader Lecson Legend Lenco Lenoir Lexsor Leyco LG Liesenk amp Tter Liesenkotter Lifetec Lihua Lloyd s Local India TV Local Malaysia TV Lodos Loewe Logik Logix Longjiang Luker Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxor LXI M Electronic Madison MAG Magnadyne Magnafon
143. 7 10362 037 10000 10250 10700 10250 149 009 11 11 10 180 10051 10 10 10 10 009 10009 10374 451 178 108 10264 10 10 10 156 767 10352 109 10217 10 037 10163 10 11 10 037 037 163 10070 10 037 10009 10 037 10217 10 698 10860 0843 1269 0170 0060 0370 017 0163 037 1982 0180 0180 086 0037 1163 0764 0037 0037 0668 0093 0030 0748 1217 0556 0714 10556 10218 10001 10037 0218 0009 0264 1498 0036 0218 0418 10714 0455 11037 10009 10218 10433 10009 10650 10264 10163 10180 10092 10879 11943 10264 10037 10668 11556 10037 10352 10443 10163 10714 11982 10073 10370 10487 10011 10264 10648 10037 10370 10060 10009 10765 Audinac Audiosonic Audioton Audiovox Audioworld Aumark Autovox Aventura AVP Awa Axion Axxent Baier Baihe Baile Baird Bang amp Olufsen Baohuashi Baosheng Barco Basic Line Bastide Bauer Baur Baysonic Bazin Beaumark Beijing Beko Belcor Bell amp Howell Belson Belstar BenQ Beon Berthen Best Bestar Bestar Daewoo Binatone Black Diamond 0009 0163 0180 0009 0218 0486 0217 0451 0802 1952 0698 0060 0217
144. 78 20240 20081 20000 20060 20046 20035 20047 20046 20035 20162 20002 20278 20226 21035 21162 20081 20037 20048 20081 20081 20037 21137 20035 20162 20037 20048 20047 20240 20000 20104 20046 21162 20037 20037 20041 20041 20060 20035 20048 20240 20045 20000 20042 20106 20226 20320 20807 20880 21035 21060 20035 20162 20037 20048 20047 20240 20000 20104 20121 20278 20046 21162 20348 20614 20616 20041 21972 21137 20037 20081 20240 20278 20038 20742 20039 20041 20278 20320 20209 20348 20104 20043 20046 20106 Sampo Samsung Samtron Sanky Sansei Sansui Sanyo Saville SBR ScanSonic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scott Sears Seaway SEG SEI Sei Sinudyne Seleco Semp Sentra Sharp Shinco Shintom Shivaki Shogun Siemens Siera Signature Silva Silver SilverCrest Singer Sinudyne Smaragd Sonic Blue Sonographe Sonolor Sontec Sonwa Sony 20037 20048 20060 20240 20045 20000 20038 20432 20739 21014 20240 20048 20039 20048 20240 20000 20067 20209 20041 20002 20106 20348 20479 21479 20048 20047 20240 20000 20104 20067 20209 20046 20348 20479 21137 20240 20278 20352 20081 20240 20000 20104 20041 20106 20315 20348 20037 2008 20642 21137 20184 20045 20121 20043 20060 2003 20048 2003 20045 2000 20067 2004 21237 20046 20278 5 9
145. 81 20352 20642 20037 20642 20000 20209 20278 20479 20637 20209 20002 20348 20479 20035 20240 20000 20041 20038 20278 20037 20240 20037 20039 20033 20000 20209 20041 20278 20479 20637 21137 21479 21972 20209 20348 20352 Sr BU 2 ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DirecTV Gateway Go Video Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush iBUYPOWER Linksys Media Center PC Microsoft Mind Niveus Media Northgate Panasonic Philips RCA ReplayTV Samsung Sonic Blue Sony Stack 9 Systemax Tagar Systems Tivo Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo ZT Group DVD Player 1 A 3D LAB 4 Acoustic Solutions AEG Aim Airis Aiwa 21972 21972 21972 21972 20739 21972 20614 21972 21972 21972 20739 20739 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 20614 20616 20618 20739 20880 20614 20616 20739 20614 20616 20636 21972 21972 21972 21972 20618 20636 20739 21008 21972 21996 21972 21972 21972 21972 30503 30539 31158 30714 30713 30730 31228 30770 30788 30790 31923 31051 31152 31973 30672 30699 30833 30672 31005 31224 31250 31321 31345 30533 30641 Akashi Akira Akura Alba Alco Alize All Tel Allegro Altacom Amitech Amoi Amphion Media Works Amstrad AMW Anam Ansonic Apex Digital
146. 82 037 982 943 937 937 037 10698 11 11 11 037 037 982 10587 11951 11952 11958 11037 11900 PRESET CODE E Elfunk 11037 DMTech 31271 Broksonic 10463 11911 Akai 20352 Palsonic 20000 F Ferguson 11037 E Elfunk 30713 30884 Bush 11556 Alba 20352 20035 20162 21035 21162 Finlux 11556 Emerson 30675 31268 Curtis Mathes 10051 America Action 20278 G Goodmans 10587 11037 11900 ESA 31268 D Daewoo 11909 Amstrad 20000 Penney 21237 H Hitachi 11960 Ferguson 30695 30713 30884 Emerson 10236 10463 11909 11911 Audiovox 20278 Philips 20081 J 11982 Funai 31268 F Ferguson 10073 10625 B Beko 20104 Portland 20637 Jensen 11933 G Goodmans 30713 Fidelity 10171 Bestar 20278 Q Quasar 20035 20162 21035 21162 11962 Grandin 30713 Funai 11904 Blue Sky 20278 20352 20742 R Radiola 20081 L Lenco 10587 Grundig 30539 30695 G GE 10047 10051 10093 11917 BPL 20046 RadioShack 20000 Logik 11037 H Hitachi 31247 cmm Broksonic 20002 20479 21479 RCA 20060 20035 20048 20240 Luker 11982 Insignia 31268 E 10374 11909 Bush 20352 20742 S Fe 20320 u M 4 di mm Grundig 10037 10195 10556 C m _ Samsung 20240 20432 21014 YS K kone m Harley Davidson 11904 0 Se Sansui 20000 20479 21479 m 11900 L 30713 30884 zu 205 sanyo SE ae i Hitachi 11904 Saville
147. 850 30784 31020 31061 31086 30539 30770 30872 31005 30675 31228 30831 30705 30831 31345 31004 30672 30672 30651 30686 30833 31004 31483 30522 30713 30699 30752 30699 30730 31163 31321 31923 30539 30646 31051 30651 30741 30869 31906 32024 30571 30665 30522 30571 30717 30790 30822 31022 31132 31769 31913 31965 30571 30490 30759 30763 30770 30788 30898 31345 31973 31347 30752 30768 30699 30841 30838 31233 30869 30672 30690 30699 30713 30730 30833 30898 31051 31227 30789 30872 30558 30623 30717 30759 30872 31004 30789 30651 3055 30798 30759 30831 31367 Salora Sampo Samsung Sansui Sanyo Scan ScanMagic ScanSonic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Schwaiger Scientific Labs Scott Seeltech SEG Sensory Science Shanghai Sharp Sharper Image Sherwood Shinco Shinsonic Siemssen Sigmatek Siltex Silva Silva Schneider SilverCrest Simaudio Singer Sistemas Skantic Skymaster Skyworth Sliding Slim Art SM Electronic Smart Sonai Sonashi Sonic Blue Sony Sound Color Soundmaster 30741 30752 31321 31347 30490 30573 30744 30199 30820 30899 31044 31075 31635 31932 30784 30695 30751 30763 30768 31051 31228 31230 31695 31832 30670 30675 30695 30713 30873 31228 30705 30850 30730 31730 31685 30770 30788 31115 31151 30539 30646 30651 30705 3071
148. AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least 3 seconds Video Format appears on the display 2 Use the A V button to set GUI Language 3 Use the 1 button to make the setting Press the ENTER MENU or RETURN button setting GER complete the 40 Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Operation on the main unit Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob X If Rec Select or Video Select is selected press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob Operation on the main remote control unit Press the SOURCE SELECT button The desired input source can be selected directly Cpu SES Com a Fen TV VCR RC SETUP Main remote control unit SOURCE SELECT d To operate the AVC A1HD using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the AMP mode IS page 64 Remote Control Unit Operations Pressing the DVD HDP button and the VCR DVR button on the main remote control will switch between the following DVD HDP DVD VCR DVR gt VCR gt DVR 1 DVR 2 Settings Related to Playing Input Sources Source Level Source Level E Play and Playback Mode iPod are displayed for input sources for which iPod dock is assigned El Play The playba
149. Audio Radiola RCA Revox Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sherwood Sonic Sony TaeKwang Tandberg Teac Technics Technovox Thorens Universum Victor Wards Wharfedale Yamaha ABS Accurian Alienware CyberPower D Link Dgtec Epson Gateway Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hush iBUYPOWER 16 Linksys Media Center PC Microsoft Mind Motorola Niveus Media 20308 20375 20229 20029 20337 20027 21306 20029 20029 20027 20029 20029 20074 20231 20337 20375 20243 21313 20439 20109 20280 20309 20229 20229 20029 20375 20244 20027 20439 20097 272 653 272 272 554 363 563 272 272 272 272 272 272 415 272 272 272 272 363 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01272 20309 20229 20220 20099 20109 21312 20220 20009 20371 20170 20291 20234 20283 20289 20308 20439 20273 20274 20029 20094 01267 01267 01365 01805 Northgate P Packard Bell Panasonic Pioneer hRicavision S Samsung Sensory Science Sharp SMC Sony Stack 9 Sylvania Systemax T Tagar Systems Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Vizio Voodoo X Xbox Z Zi Group Satellite Receiver Sky A Mark ABsat ADB AGS Aiwa Akai Alba Allsat Alltech Allvision AlphaStar Amitronica Amstrad Anglo Ankaro AntSat Apollo Arcon Armstrong Arnion Asat ASCI ASLF A
150. BLE Tuner Satellite Receiver Connecting the Recording Components 2 Digital 556 Recorder n 2 SI E Recorder n LLLI CD Recorder MD Recorder Tape Deck Connections to Other Devices Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector 18 MigeoieameraMaSam consec d S LL 18 Component with Multi channel Output Connectors 18 External Power Amplifier s MU External Controlar Connecting the Power Cord 2 Once Connections are Completed EE 22 GUI Menu Operations Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at afie 23 Example of Display of Default Values 23 Examples of GUI Screen Displays Example Browse Menu Top Menu 23 Example Menus with Illustrations Auto Setup 29 Cursor Position Display ENEE 23 ODperattons Hee 23 GUI Menu Map ETE ET 24 Auto Setup Preparations eee 25 Auto Setup 25 Auto Setup 25 26 Error Messages eee 57 Option 237 22200020 ce rerer 271 Source 37 G nn 37 Trigger Out 1 igger Out 2 rigger Out 3 rigger Out 4 ransducer Setup EE 38 Digital EU Remote ID 5 2Way Remote 522052 z Setup ere m Maimtenance Firmware Update Add New Feature
151. Carefully check the left L and right R channels and the inputs and connectors outputs and be sure to interconnect correctly Video camera Game console VIDEO AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL DVD player OUT OUT OUT Super Audio CD player External decoder D H AUDIO Components Equipped with a DENON Se q pp 0 ODER FRONT CENTER SURROUND 5 LINK connector L R L R Multi channel playback is possible with DVD Audio discs Super 8 Audio CD etc 1 n 2 L 1 1 DVD player AUDIO DENON LINK B MONITOR 3J HE A 9 AVC ATHD play the analog input signals input to the EXT IN connectors press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button on the main remote control unit and select EXT IN or make the settings at GUI menu Source Select input source Input Mode Input Mode EXT IN i page 43 The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player IS page 13 To play copyright protected discs connect the AVC A1HD s EXT IN connector with the DVD
152. DMI Setup HDMI Control Power Off Control 8 page 31 set to s the control function used for the television HDMI properly set Check the television operating instructions for details Should any of the operations below be performed the interlocking function may be reset in which case repeat Operation s 2 and 3 e GUI menu Source Select Assign HDMI page 41 setting has changed There is a change to the connection between the equipment and the HDMI or an increase in equipment AVC A1HD GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Monitor Out I page 31 is changed Channel Level You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste as described below Quick Select Function With this function the currently playing input source input mode surround mode room settings and volume can be stored in Last Function Memory This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set the memory When the power is turned back on the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set 1 Press CH SELECT Set the input source input mode surround mode room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you Use CH SELECT to select the speaker anii The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed Backu
153. Dolby Digital Surround EX is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the surround channel sound The result is 360 degrees of movement and moving sound effects that seem to pass right over the listener s head This System was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Laboratories fusing 5 idea of improving spatial expression and achieving a uniform 360 degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories matrix encoding technology Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the existing system Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and the new surround back SB channel was added to achieve improvements over the conventional 5 1 channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the rear the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the back as well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with the multi surround speaker systems used in movie theaters thereby enabling various types of surround sound The surround back channel signal is a matrixencoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital SL surround left and SR surround right channels Upon playback the signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder within the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL SR and SB channels and output as 6 1 channels of signals With the AVC A1HD the signals further undergo Home THX Cinema processing to achieve a THX Surround EX system Even without the proper environment f
154. EE yaaa Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital etc n Dalay Hise tel nie DSP Simulation Playback Stereo Playback EE Playback M EA E PO A E tata a EE Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode Parameter Other Operations and Functions Audio 7 27 7 7 7 75 46 Other Operations EE EE El Surround Parameters Supe Acioa Tone Recording on an External Device REC OUT model n Room 3 2 2 22 22222 2222222 2222222222222 2222 22222222 49 Convenient Functions D Dynamic EQ sa p A EAA A AS nas 49 0 1001 7 222 2 2 2012 2272 n eer 49 Channel Night Mode 49 Fader Function Audio Delay 210 Quick Select Function Picture Adjust DEE 50 Personal Memory Plus Function e e 2 2 2 D Ee EE 50 Last Function Memory EES Brightness 50 Chroma Level 50 Resetting the Microprocessor D E 2 1 0 00 50 50 RESTETCSPIPSI UPIUOPETETSES M ee Mein RemoteContmlUnit 2 Operating DENON Audio 64 Presetting Information Operating Preset Components 2 a 64 66 50 Seting the
155. EMA SACD DSD multi ch ULTI IN PLIIx MUSIC ULTI CH IN 71 1 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Matrix 6 1 and the AVC A1HD s AFDM setting is set to 2 This is displayed when the inpu 3 This is displayed when the inpu For details see page 86 87 signal is DTS ES Discrete 6 17 signal is DTS 96 24 Dolby Headphone The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack while in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND mode Selectable items DOLBY HEADPHONE When RECOUT mode is set SOURCE with this amplifier signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from the recording output terminals and recorded on another recorder 128 page 60 DSP Simulation Playback The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 9 DENON original surround modes The surround parameters can be adjusted amp amp page 84 85 to achieve an even more realistic powerful sound field Selectable items 7CH STEREO 1 This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers WIDE SCREEN This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of viewing a movie on a large screen SUPER STADIUM This mode programs is suited for viewing sports ROCK ARENA This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in an arena JAZZ CLUB This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
156. Glen Cie SCREEN Speaker Setup 1237 28 30 Network Setup 37 33 35 Option Setup page 36 39 AFDM C SUPER STADIUM Speaker Configuration Network Setup Amp Assign SB CH Out ROCK ARENA e Subwoofer Setup Other Volume Control Subwoofer I JAZZ CLUB e Distance Power Saving Volume Limit Subwoofer Channel Level Character Power On Level Default CLASSIC CONCERT e Crossover Frequency PC Language Mute Level Tone MONO MOVIE e THX Audio Setup Network Information Source Delete Tone Defeat VIDEO GAME e Surround Speaker 9 Zone Setup 257 35 36 GUI MATRIX HDMI Setup t amp page 31 ZONE2 ZONE3 Screensaver Front e Color Space Bass Wall Paper Center e RGB Range Treble Format Surround e Auto Lip Sync HPF Text Surround Back Audio Lch Level Master Volume Subwoofer e Monitor Out Level NET USB iPod Dos E e HDMI Control Channel Quick Select Name ynamic Audio Setup page 32 33 Volume Level Trigger Out 1 Nh NES EXT IN Setup Volume Limit Trigger Out 2 Audio Delay Surround Speaker Power On Level Trigger Out 3 Q Picture Adjust Subwoofer Level Mute Level Trigger Out 4 Contrast 2ch Direct Stereo OSD Transducer Setup Brightness Downmix Option Digital Out Chroma Level
157. Hypson Hyundai beria CE Ges iyama 10218 10009 1494 10109 0037 0218 0009 0208 10217 11502 10264 10036 10218 10817 10455 11502 10009 10817 10264 11217 0455 10748 10508 10860 11208 10054 10156 10030 10744 11137 11225 10578 10481 10163 10036 10108 10218 10865 10009 10264 10264 11363 10860 10455 11163 10264 10817 10374 10264 10668 10865 10218 0037 0264 10610 0145 0556 1 1022 0017 0051 1145 0877 1149 1576 0548 0480 0109 10035 0610 1556 0817 10817 10455 10714 10876 10264 Ima Imperial Imperial Crown Indiana Infinity InFocus Ingelen Ingersol Inno Hit Innova Innowert Inotech Insignia Inteq Interbuy Interfunk Internal Intervision Irradio Isukai J J J J J IX ITC S T TT Nokia d H DV iahua laLiCai IL infeng inque inta inxing MB NC ohnson ubilee uhua utan 10236 10180 10037 10074 001 10009 10264 10374 10 10 10 10 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10009 037 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 1
158. INEMA Q In the DOLBY HEADPHONE mode Selectable items CINEMA MUSIC 6 CINEMA NEO 6 MUSIC OFF Cinema Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding Selectable items ON DRC Compress dynamic range difference between loud and soft sounds Selectable items Auto Low Middle High OFF I This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode D COMP Compress dynamic range difference between loud and soft sounds Selectable items OFF Low Middle High When playing DTS sources this is only displayed for compatible software LFE Adjust the low frequency effects level LFE Variable range 10dB proper playback of the different program sources we recommend setting to the values below Dolby Digital sources 0 dB e DTS movie sources 0 dB e DTS music sources 10 dB Center Image Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound Variable range 0 0 1 0 Assign front L R signal also to surround channels wider sound OFF Selectable items ON Dimension Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance Variable range 0 3 6 Center Width Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound Variable range 0 3 7
159. Kimari Kneissel Kodak Kolin Kolster KTV Kuba Kuba Electronic Lenco LG Lifetec Linksys Lloyd s Loewe Logik Lumatron Lunatron 20042 20739 20739 21972 20037 20000 20209 20278 20352 20480 20047 20000 21972 20000 20240 20209 20037 20081 20104 20278 20637 20037 20278 20642 20037 20000 20209 20278 20348 20037 20081 21137 20240 20104 20041 20046 20106 20240 20104 20041 20106 20037 20278 20240 20278 20067 20041 20209 20348 20352 20742 20000 20184 20081 20045 20067 20041 21162 20037 20081 20278 20642 20037 20278 20037 20209 20278 20106 20315 20348 20642 20041 20038 20046 20209 20278 20348 7 0 7 H d 5 20037 20043 20041 9 0 7 7 8 H 20240 20045 20000 20042 20209 20278 20038 20225 20480 21137 21237 20209 20348 21972 20240 20000 20038 21062 20162 20037 20081 21262 21562 20240 20000 20209 20106 20278 21137 21137 11 12 20048 20047 20104 20043 GE 20046 20106 20315 LXI 20037 20000 20042 20067 M Electronic 20037 20240 20000 20038 agnadyne 20081 Magnasonic 2031 20240 20000 20278 20035 20037 20048 20039 agnavox 20081 20240 20000 20226 20618 20642 21593 21781 Magnin 20240 agnum 20642 Manesth 20081 20045 20209 arantz 20035 20081 20209 20038 Mark 20000 20278 arta 20037
160. L ON SLA SRA FL FR ZUA OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR FL FR Bi amp ZONES or CON SLA SRA FL FR 73178 OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR FLFR on LON SLA SRA FLFR 72173 Bi amp ZONE OFF SLA SRA FLFR 72 MONO Om ON SLA SRA FLFR 73 OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR FLFR L ON 73 UR ZUR ZONE2 OFF SLA SRA SLB SRB 72 ZONE3 CON 73 UR OFF SLA SRA SBL SER SLB SRB ow L DN 73 MONO Z2IMOND ZONE2 3 OFF SLA SRA SLB SRB Z2 MONO MONO LON 73 MONO OFF SLA SRA SBL SBR SLB SRB 93 E E Di 5 5 e Troubleshooting Be If a problem should arise first check the following 1 Are the connections correct 2 Is the set being operated as described in the owner s manual 3 Are the other components operating properly If this unit does not operate properly check the items listed in the table below Should the problem persist there may be a malfunction In this case disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase General Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Power does not e Connection of the power cord 18 Check that the power plugs are 22 turn on or turns faulty securely inserted into the AVC off directly after it A1HD s inlet and the wall was turned on power outlet No sound is e Connection with the input Check the connections 10 produced from devices or connection of the speakers speaker
161. MMER button z igoureur ZONE2 ONE 3 ZONE 4 m ON OFF ON OFF _ ON OFF USB S VIDEO VIDEO V AUX INPUT L AUDIO R OPTICAL 5 SCALE button eere 43 D USB port 19 ZONE4 ON OFF button D ZONE3 ON OFF button eee 78 6 ZONE2 ON OFF 78 AUDIO DELAY button m 50 Cursor buttons AV 4 D mS 23 GAME INPUT MODE button 43 7CH STEREO button 45 DSP SIMULATION button 46 6 HOME THX CINEMA button 44 STANDARD button 45 PURE DIRECT button 46 AUDYSSEY 1 9 Input signal indicators 2 Input signal channel indicators These light when digital signals are input Information display The input source name surround mode setting values and other information are displayed here Output signal channel indicators Surround speaker indicators These light according to the settings of the surround and B speakers Monitor output indicators These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting When set to Auto Dual the indicators light according to the connection status Master volume indicator Q AUDYSSEY DYNAMIC EQ indicator This lights when the Dynamic EO is selected AUDYSSEY MULTEO XT indicator This lights when the room equalizer is selected 10 Reco
162. OTE ST 3 When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals When playing Dolby True HD signal When playing Dolby Digital DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD Ul menu Parameter Audio Surround Parameters Ul menu Parameter Audio Surround Parameters ode is set to Cinema ode is set to Cinema Signals and adjustability in the different modes Parameter default values are shown in parentheses NEO 6 Surround Mode PRO LOGIC II IIx MUSIC mode only MUSIC EXT IN only D 7 Mode Decoder Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer mode only Tone Night Mode Room EQ ES RESTORER Panorama Dimension Center Center Subwoofer Width Image Att PURE DIRECT DIRECT x x x x x OFF O NOTES O NOTES DSD DIRECT D DSD MULTI DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT x x x x x x OFF NOTES NOTES x STEREO x x x x x x x x x x x 0 dB OFF OFF O OFF EXT IN x x x 26 MULTI CH IN x x x x x x x x x x x O 0 dB O OFF O O OFF x WIDE SCREEN x x 10 x x x x x O 0 dB O OFF O OFF O OFF C OFF O GE CINEMA x
163. On in order to display the iPod s photo data or videos on the monitor For details see the iPod s operating instructions Sub remote control unit About the button names in these explanations Buttons on the main unit Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 54 Playing Network Audio USB Devices This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture JPEG files stored on a computer or USB memory device T About the Internet radio function e Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in The AVC A1HD is equipped with the following Internet radio functions Stations can be selected by genre and region Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA Windows Media Audio format can be listened to Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer The function is managed for individual users so you must provide your MAC or e mail address Exclusive URL http www radiodenon com The radio station database service may be suspended without notice The 6 Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service vTuner This
164. RITES USB Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used ZONE SELECT LOCK Mlode We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room When this is done the unit can be set so that the Switching Zones Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit Press ZONE SELECT The currently selected multi zone indicator lights 2 While the multi zone indicator is light press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to be operated The currently selected multi zone indicator lights 72 zone does not switch when buttons are operated 1 Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP All the multi zone indicators light Select the multi zone to be set The selected multi zone indicator lights DTo set to MAIN ZONE Press REPEAT To set to ZONE2 Press RANDOM To set to ZONE3 Press USB To set to ZONE4 Press ALL MUSIC FAVORITES Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The multi zone indicator turns off To Cancel 1 Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The currently selected multi zone indicator lights Press ZONE SELECT All the multi zone indicators light Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The multi zone indicator turns off Setting the Remote ID When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room make this setting so that no AV re
165. SSTAMMELSESINTYG Denna utrustning ar i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestammelser i Direktiv 1999 5 EC uppfyller foljande standarder EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 och EN50385 EU konformitetsintyget kan pa beg ran fas fran DENON Europe var representant i Europe DENON EUROPE Division of D amp M Germany GmbH An der Landwehr 19 Nettetal D 41334 Germany CAUTION To completely disconnect this product from the mains disconnect the plug from the wall socket outlet The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be within easy access by the user VORSICHT Um dieses Ger t vollstandig von der Stromversorgung abzutrennen ziehen Sie bitte den Stecker aus der Wandsteckdose Der Netzstecker wird verwendet um die Stromversorgung zum Ger t v llig zu unterbrechen er muss f r den Benutzer gut und einfach zu erreichen sein PRECAUTION Pour d connecter compl tement ce produit du courant secteur d branchez la prise de la prise murale La prise secteur est utilis e pour couper compl tement l alimentation de l appareil et l utilisateur doit pouvoir y acc der facilement ATTENZIONE Per scollegare completamente questo prodotto dalla rete di alimentazione elettrica scollegare la spina dalla relativa presa a muro La spina di rete viene utilizzata per interrompere completament
166. T IN IN NE eel Pn R A E c Aas 1 R Z 16 e analog connections if wish record analog audio signals e When recording to a digital video recorder it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVC A1HD DVR 1 OUT connector Example TV IN S Video cable DVR 1 OUT S Video cable TV IN Video cable DVR 1 OUT Video cable When using cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVR 1 Assign Component I 42 e Connect a DVR 2 in the same way e When using a component video cable or BNC cable for the component video connection of DVR 2 make the settings at GUI menu Source Select DVR 2 Assign Component IS page 42 Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVC A1HD s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other
167. _ File operations _ Page forward screen Page forward sereen SEARCH Browse Remote mode switching press Character search arid hold RETURN File operations File operations CIA Y Track search Track search m Stop Stop _ gt 1 Play pause Play pause 1 track all track repeat play USB Media server 1 track all track repeat play _ RANDOM Random play USB Media server Song album shuffle play USB X3 X3 ALL MUSIC 5 Media server only i FAVORITES X5 X1 Affects the currently selected zone X2 ZONEA it is not possible to select sources with no digital input signals iPod etc Network audio signals Internet radio media server USB can be played as long as The input source switches to NET X4 The input source switches to NET 5 The input source switches to NET hey are not copyright protected USB and the files on the USB memory device are played USB and the files in All Music on the media server are played USB and the files in Favorites are played Whether All Music or Favorites is selected depends on the Direct Play setting IS page 44 71 23 zl z e 2 E 5 Izd Ld Multi zone e EE ST ZONE SELECT Is L ADVANCED SETUP ZONE OFF MENU RANDOM ALL MUSIC REPEAT JE A 59 FAVO
168. a movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the listeners creating an acoustic image as if the sound were floating in space To achieve these effects we recommend placing the speakers for the surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than with conventional surround systems Doing so sometimes increases the surround effect when playing conventional 5 1 channel sources in the THX Surround EX mode Check the surround effects of the various modes before selecting the surround mode Examples of speaker layouts Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them 1 For THX surround EX systems Using surround back speakers D When mainly playing movies Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2 way Speakers Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer Surround back speaker Speaker Front speaker SS 60 to 90 2 Sa cm Point slightly downwards Surround Surround back speakers As seen from the side As seen from above 79 E 5 Di 5 E speakers for the surround speakers Center speaker For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment diffuse The AVC A1HD is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that radiation speakers such as bipolar THX types or dipolar types lets you play program sources
169. a interpolation along the time axis or up converted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the original data digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing free pulse response pulsive music data and attack sounds This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the delicate nuances in the music the positions of the performers and the breadth height and depth of the concert hall Advanced AL24 Processing is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD DIRECT 83 5 Di 5 5 9 zi HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based on DVI Digital Visual Interface standards and optimized for use in consumer equipment Non compressed digital video and multi channel audio signals are transmitted with a single connection HDMI is also compatible with HDCP High bandwidth Digital Contents Protection a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI Deep Color Eliminates on screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors Enables increased contrast ratio Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white At 30 bit pixel depth a four times improvement would be the minimum and the t
170. able 00276 00003 DMX Electronics 40157 Polk Audio 40157 ABC 00237 00003 00008 Maspro 01510 US Electronics 00276 00003 00008 Dual 40003 Proceed 40420 Accuphase 00003 Matav 01082 V Videoway 00000 Dynaco 40157 Proton 40157 Acorn 00237 Memorex 00000 Visiopass 00817 Dynamic Bass 40179 Q of 40157 Action 00237 Mitsubishi 00003 Z Zenith 00000 00525 00899 F Fisher 40000 40179 Quad 40157 Des 00237 Motorola 0 CH 00476 00810 00276 G Garrard 40393 40420 Quasar 40029 G 40000 40032 40037 40179 Radiol 40157 ADB 01230 MS 00303 Cable PVR Combination X1 40157 40000 40032 40179 40420 Aichi Denshi 01512 olamun RadioShack d 2 N NEC 01496 Americast 00899 m 40157 40468 Americast 00899 mm 00817 D 5i RCA 40032 40053 40179 40420 Ansan Nova Vision 00008 men H Arche 00237 F Freebox 01482 Harman Kardon 40100 40157 40173 Realistic 40000 40032 40087 40179 Novaplex 00008 G General Instrument 00810 Hitachi 40032 40420 40468 Auna 01230 NTL 00276 00003 01060 01068 J Jerrold 00810 Restek 40157 Austar 00276 0 00303 kel 40157 B Bcc M Motorola 01376 00810 01187 Integra 40101 x 01068 01877 00237 4 Jerrold 40003 Roksan 40420 Bell South 00899 Optus 00276 01060 01877 00877 Rotel 40157 40420 n JVC 40032 40072 5 Bestlink 00303 01877 00877 00237 00008 me 5 40420 20 01060 01068 01577 S Scientific Atlanta 01877 00877 4
171. ake the settings at GUI menu Source Select input source to which iPod dock assigned Assign iPod dock 5 42 14 TV CABLE Tuner Satellite Receiver Connect the cables to be used TV tuner VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL AUDIO OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 18 19 88 ETHERNET Li VJ V WV WV O 2 e E Fee y gt J DOCK CONTROL Pp 11 MONITOR i i gt MAS Ce SI VCR Pod DVR 1 A S 5 IE ee s s 8 e When using a coaxial digital cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select TV CBL Assign Digital I gt 42 When using a BNC cable for the component video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select TV CBL Assign Component I
172. are converted as such into analog signals When playing in other surround modes the DSD signals are first converted into PCM format then into analog signals e DSD DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD 2 channel signals in the DIRECT mode DSD MULTI DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD multi channel signals in the DIRECT mode The DSD signal may not be output depending on the equipment that is connected For further details refer to the user manual for the equipment being used Recording on an External Device REC OUT mode You can listen to one program source while recording a different program source Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT gt ZONES SOURCE is shown on the display Turn SOURCE SELECT until RECOUT SOURCE is displayed The indicator lights ZONE3 SOURCE ZONE3 TUNER lt ZONE3 NET USB RECOUT NET USB lt gt lt RECOUT SOURCE Turn SOURCE SELECT to choose the input source to be recorded Play the program source For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s operating instructions Start recording For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s operating instructions cancel press lt ZONE2 3 4 SELECT then turn SOURCE SELECT until ZONE3 SOURCE is displayed Make a test recording before starting the actual recording Signals are only output to the anal
173. below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and a monitor Subwoofer Center speaker Surround back speakers Front speakers Place the front speakers to the sides of the monitor or screen and as flush with the screen surface as possible Surround speakers Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front left FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 60 cm The table below shows typical speaker configuration the AVC A1HD SURROUND SURROUND FRONT CENTER A B SURROUND BACK a L R L R L R L R 1 only 9 1 channels 1 O O O O 7 1 channels O 1 6 1 channels OO O O O O g 5 1 channels O O O O 3 1 channels OO 2 1 channels OO 2 channels O O The AVC A1HD be connected to maximum of subwoofers 10 Speaker Connections Example 9 3 channels Front Center Subw ofer1 Front spea
174. berHome Cytron D Vision Daenyx 30672 30651 30695 30699 30713 30790 30843 31423 31004 30783 30898 31005 32023 30770 31115 30503 30651 30551 30695 30672 30717 30690 30699 30713 30723 30730 30831 30833 30884 31051 31140 31483 31695 31832 30872 30798 31152 30490 30751 31109 30690 31051 30699 30789 31421 31923 30730 31020 31730 30672 31004 30713 30789 31005 31227 31923 30751 31115 30627 31061 30831 30841 30713 30872 30699 30833 30869 31483 30695 30571 30730 31730 30672 30675 30788 31233 30713 30730 30852 31086 31321 31923 31233 31321 30672 30852 31321 30788 30831 30872 30831 30503 30539 30690 30713 30770 31115 31228 31087 30831 30714 30816 30874 31023 31024 31117 31129 31502 30651 30705 30774 31347 31115 31367 30872 Daewoo Dalton Dansai Dantax Daytek Dayton DCE Decca Denon Denver Denzel Desay Dgtec Diamond Digihome DigiLogic digiRED Digitech Digitor Digitrex Dik Dinamic Disney DiViDo DK Digital DMTech Dragon DreamX DSE Dual Durabrand DVD2000 DVX E max EagleTec eBench ECC Eclipse Elfunk Elin Elite Ellion Elta Eltax Emerson Enterprise 30490 30784 30705 30714 30770 30833 30869 30872 31172 31483 31906 31036 30770 30783 31115 31695 30539 30713 30723 30790 30872 31005 30872 30831 30770 31115 30490 30634
175. best possible frequency response and surround levels moment by moment as volume is changed The result is bass response tonal balance and surround impression that remain constant despite changes in volume This is the first technology to combine information from incoming source evels with actual output sound levels in the room a pre requisite for delivering a loudness correction solution Audyssey Dynamic EO works in tandem with Audyssey to provide well balanced sound for every listener at any volume level 7 AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT DYNAMIC EQ Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories U S and foreign patents pending Audyssey MultEQ XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories Dynamic is a trademark oF Audyssey Laboratories For more information visit www audyssey com HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital HDCD is an encoding decoding technology that greatly reduces he distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are automatically to select the optimum digital processing 2 Focb 8 HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital and icrosoft are either registered trademarks or trademarks of icrosoft Corporation Inc in the United States and or other countries HDCD system manufa
176. bles et peuvent tre r utilis s Veuillez disposer des mat riaux conform ment aux lois sur le recyclage en vigueur Lorsque vous mettez cet appareil au rebut respectez les lois ou r glementations en vigueur Les piles ne doivent jamais tre jet es ou incin r es mais mises au rebut conform ment aux lois en vigueur sur la mise au rebut des piles Ce produit et les accessoires inclus l exception des piles sont des produits conformes la directive DEEE NOTA RELATIVA AL RICICLAGGIO materiali di imballaggio di questo prodotto sono riutilizzabili e riciclabili Smaltire i materiali conformemente alle normative locali sul riciclaggio Per lo smaltimento dell unit osservare le normative o le leggi locali in vigore Non gettare le batterie n incenerirle ma smaltirle conformemente alla normativa locale sui rifiuti chimici Questo prodotto e gli accessori inclusi nell imballaggio sono applicabili alla direttiva RAEE ad eccezione delle batterie ACERCA DEL RECICLAJE Los materiales de embalaje de este producto son reciclables y se pueden volver a utilizar Disponga de estos materiales siguiendo los reglamentos de reciclaje de su localidad Cuando se deshaga de la unidad cumpla con las reglas o reglamentos locales Las pilas nunca deber n tirarse ni incinerarse Deber disponer de ellas siguiendo los reglamentos de su localidad relacionados con los desperdicios qu micos Este producto junto con los accesorios empaquetados
177. cable or a BNC cable for the video connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select VCR Assign Component I 42 Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVC A1HD s OPTICAL4 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICALA Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals or digital connections if you wish to record digital audio signals depending on the types of connectors on the components being used CD recorder MD recorder Tape deck AUDIO AUDIO OPTICAL AUDIO OUT OUT OPTICAL oO I Lal ey 4 20 med 2 48 1 DVR 4 8 20 4 st 2 ZONED 8 a Y 0 A 232501 Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVC A1HD s OPTICAL4 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICALA 17 bal 5 E o eh 9 5 Connections to Other Devices Video Camera Game Console Component with Multi channel Output
178. ccess point settings To search for the network automatically At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network To set manually Setup Detail setting set DHCP to OFF and enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway primary DNS and secondary DNS D Input the SSID 2 If there is security select the encryption method 3 Input the encryption key To not pass through the proxy server 4 If WEP was selected in If searching is possible the If searching is not possible access points are displayed step 2 select the default This setting is required key when the network is Normally select 1 established proxy servers Make the SSID setting at Manual Select the access point to be set At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Detail Proxy setting set Proxy to ON and enter the address or domain name and port numbers This completes the setting Input the encryption key For WEP also input the default key This is the flow for infrastructure type communications For ad hoc communications set Mode at the Detail settings to Ad hoc Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings For details consult a network administrator Connection continued on right page 34 Other Make setting for amp power save mode and compu
179. ceiver other than the desired one operates 1 While pressing MENU press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen The multi zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID flashes 2 Select the remote ID to be set To set to 1 Press REPEAT indicator flashes To set to 2 Press RANDOM The Z2 indicator flashes To set to 3 Press USB The Z3 indicator flashes To set to 4 Press ALL MUSIC FAVORITES The Z4 indicator flashes While pressing MENU press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen The multi zone indicator turns off When changing a setting be sure to set the same remote ID as the 5 IG page 38 Resetting the Settings While pressing ZONE OFF press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen All the multi zone indicators flash 4 times then all the settings are restored to their defaults Setting 1 9 1 channel playback MAIN ZONE Amp Assign Multi Zone Connections and Operations The AVC A1HD is compatible with the following types of playback Amp Assign mode Multi zone playback ZONE2 amp ZONE3 2 Dich 98 gt Normal Default Bi amp playback front speaker Bi wiring playback front speaker Sie Si For bi amp and bi wiring playback use speakers compatible with that type of connection When conducting bi amp or bi wiring playback remove the short circuiti
180. cer Emphasize picture contours Variable range 0 12 Sharpness Adjust color definition Variable range 6 0 6 e When the input signal is 1080p the Picture Adjust setting will be ineffective e Adjusting the Contrast Brightness Chroma Level and Hue settings does not affect the HDMI input signal Hue can be adjusted for composite video and S Video signals e The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources e DNR Enhancer and Sharpness are each effective with output However they are ineffective with 4801 5761 output Information Status Shows information about current settings Menu tree ZONE2 3 4 El MAIN ZONE Shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE The items displayed differ according to the input source Items to be checked Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode EQ Dynamic EO Video Select i pScaler Source Level Rec Select Night Mode RESTORER etc ZONE2 3 4 Shows information about settings for multi zone Items to be checked Power SelectSource Volume Level emi E Audio Input Signal Shows information about audio input signals Menu tree Audio Input Signal Items to be checked Surround Mode The currently set surround mode is displayed Signal The input signal type is displayed f
181. ck screen is displayed Assign Assign input sources to input connectors Input source NET USB iPod Playback Mode iPod Make settings for iPod playback Repeat Make settings for repeat mode Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX TUNER CD Selectable items All One Shuffle Make settings for shuffle mode Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX TUNER CD Selectable items Songs Albums This can be selected for input sources for which Assign is assigned at the iPod dock setting HDMII Select HDMI connector to assign to this source Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 VAUX Selectable items 1 2 3 4 5 6 None Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT Default setting HDMI1 HDMI2 None HDMI3 Input source VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Default setting HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 None e With HDMI connection video and audio signals transmitted simultaneously To play the video signal assigned at HDMI combined with the audio signal assigned at Digital select Digital at the GUI menu Source Select Input Mode
182. compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices Connecting the Monitor Connecting the Playback Components e Connect the cables to be used i page 9 Video Conversion Function Carefully check the left L and right R channels and the inputs and outputs and be sure to interconnec e With connections the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable correctly To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections set GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio to TV IP page 31 DVD Player Monitor 5 see Connect the cables to be used VIDEO SVIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI e With HDMI connections the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable Ed IN IN IN IN EMEN DVD player VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COAXIAL AUDIO d L L A OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT L R 1 H U H U
183. cted IG page 28 30 BGC Boundary Gain Compensation If bass sound feels big compensate by lowering volume Selectable items ON Ld f the bass sound seems too strong Set BGC to This activates a filter that gently reduces very deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall deep bass response Select ON or OFF according to how strong you prefer the deep bass response to be This can be set when the THX Ultra2 Subwoofer setting is set to Nes SB Speaker Position Set the distance between the left and right surround back speakers Under 0 3m Selectable items 0 3 12m Over 1 2m When two surround back speakers have been set in Speaker Configuration IG page 28 set the distance of the speakers This option is not available when 1spkr is selected This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Surround Speaker Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode THX DOLBY DTS Cinema Selectable items A B THX DOLBY DTS Music Selectable items A B THX DOLBY Game Selectable items B WIDE 5 Selectable items B 7 5 Selectable items B DSP SIMULATION Selectable items B A
184. ctured under license from icrosoft Corporation Inc This product is covered by one or more of the following In the USA 5 479 168 5 638 074 5 640 161 5 808 574 5 838 274 5 854 600 5 864 311 5 872 531 and in identified Australia 669114 Other patents pending DENON LINK DENON LINK is a unique digital balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON It offers high speed high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss It can be used together with DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz 24 bit 2 channel digital signals of DVD Audio discs PCM multi channel signals etc Full spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition Advanced AL24 Processing Mlulti channel Equipped with Advanced AL24 Processing time axis region information volume expansion In addition to the existing AL24 Processing Plus bit expansion technology DENON has also developed Advanced AL24 Processing that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region using high speed signal detection and processing technology In addition to expanding original 16 bit digital data to 24 bits Advanced AL24 Processing uses dat
185. d and NET DTU remote ID at the same time NUMBER Er RC SETUP Learning Function If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVC A1HD s main remote control unit Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to Setting the Remote ID set When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press AMP to set the main remote control unit to the AMP mode Press 9 7 and 5 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds mode is set The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press the button to be set Refer to the table at the right and use NUMBER to The main remote control unit s display turns off input the 5 digit number corresponding to the remote ID to be changed The signal transmission indicator flashes twice X If a button that cannot be learned is pressed the signal transmission indicator lights but the signal is not learned Press iPod or NET DTU to select the mode to be set 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all modes Point the main remot
186. d DSE Dual Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Elbe Electrohome Electrophonic Elin Elta Emerald Emerex Emerson ESA ESC EuroLine Ferguson Fidelity Finlandia Finlux 20035 20081 20000 20037 20278 20480 20060 20035 20162 20240 20000 20041 20278 20432 21035 20240 21972 20081 20037 20045 20104 20209 20278 20046 20352 20637 20642 21137 21278 20278 20352 20037 20278 20048 20081 20042 20104 20046 20081 20000 20067 20209 20041 20352 20048 20081 20042 20104 20278 21972 20081 20042 20041 20037 20348 20642 20739 20209 20642 20081 20000 20041 20278 20348 20081 20000 20104 20039 20038 20642 20240 20000 20278 20038 20060 20037 20240 20000 20043 20209 20037 20240 20278 20184 20121 20032 20035 20037 20184 20039 20240 20045 20000 20121 20043 20209 20002 20278 20479 20637 21278 20348 21479 21593 21137 20240 20278 21593 0 8 2000 2034 20240 20000 20352 20432 20037 20048 20081 20000 20042 20104 20043 20046 20106 20226 20081 20000 20042 20104 20041 20278 20320 Firstline Fisher Flint Fuji Fujitsu Fujitsu General Funai Galaxi Galaxis Garrard Gateway GE GEC Gemini General General Technic Genexxa Go Video GoldStar Goodmans GPX Gradiente Graetz Granada Grandin Grundig aaz animex anseatic aojie a
187. database service provides a list edited and created for the AVC A1HD Media server This function lets you play music files and playlists m3u wpl stored on a computer media server connected to the AVC A1HD via a network With the AVC A1HD s network audio playback function connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service Windows Media DRM10 Album art function When a WMA Windows Media Audio 4 file includes album art data the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing For music files in WMA Windows Media Audio format the album is only played when using Windows Media Player ver 11 Slide show function Still picture JPEG files stored in folders on a media server can be played as slide shows The time for which each picture is displayed can be set When still picture JPEG played the AVC A1HD they played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder so store in them in the direction in which you want them to play Installing Windows Media Player ver 11 CD If Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed either download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a Windows update installer 2 Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver 11 either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update instal
188. e l alimentazione all unit e deve essere facilmente accessibile all utente PRECAUCION Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentaci n el ctrica desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared El enchufe de la alimentaci n el ctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por completo el suministro de alimentaci n el ctrica a la unidad y debe de encontrarse en un lugar al que el usuario tenga f cil acceso WAARSCHUWING Om de voeding van dit product volledig te onderbreken moet de stekker uit het stopcontact worden getrokken De netstekker wordt gebruikt om de stroomtoevoer naar het toestel volledig te onderbreken en moet voor de gebruiker gemakkelijk bereikbaar zijn F RSIKTIHETSM TT Koppla loss stickproppen fr n eluttaget f r att helt skilja produkten fran n tet Stickproppen anv nds for att helt bryta str mf rs rjningen till apparaten och den m ste vara l ttillg nglig for anvandaren 4 NOTE ON USE HINWEISE ZUM GEBRAUCH OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L UTILISATION NOTE SULL USO NOTAS SOBRE EL USO ALVORENS GEBRUIKEN OBSERVERA ANGAENDE ANVANDNINGEN Avoid high temperatures Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack Vermeiden Sie hohe Temperaturen Beachten Sie dass eine ausreichende Bel ftung gew hrleistet wird wenn das Ger t auf ein Regal gestellt wird Eviter des temp ratures lev es Tenir compte d une dispersion de chaleur
189. e Delete e Adjust volume cannot be selected Switch input source When using these functions do not assign the HDMI to TV CBL Dolby Headphone recording When REC OUT mode is set to SOURCE with the AVC A1HD it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate Connections y3eq e d recorder Player compatible T 3 I 1 The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when uh HE Television compatible with headphones are connected to PHONES during HDMI control function playbackintheSTANDARD DOLBY DTS Surround HDMI AUDIO OPTICAL HDMI mode OUT OUT OUT IN When this is done signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone 6 mode are automatically output from the recording output terminals analog and digital and can be recorded 8 8 Select the parameters and set the desired mode Start recording Refer to the Dolby Headphone IS page 45 Do not disconnect the headphones during recording L DENON AVC A1HD PEU D AC OUTET 61 az D lt 5 1 STANDARD
190. e Separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons e This product and its antenna must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter WICHTIGER HINWEIS NEHMEN SIE KEINE VER NDERUNGEN AN DIESEM PRODUKT VOR Wenn dieses Produkt entsprechend dieser Bedienungsanleitung aufgebaut wird entspricht es den Anforderungen der R amp TTE Richtlinie Ver nderungen am Produkt k nnen zu gef hrlicher Funk und EMV Strahlung f hren VORSICHT e Zwischen der Antenne dieses Produkts und Personen muss ein Schutzabstand von 20 cm eingehalten werden e Dieses Produkt und seine Antenne d rfen nicht neben anderen Antennen oder Sendern aufgestellt oder zusammen mit ihnen verwendet werden MISE EN GARDE IMPORTANTE NE JAMAIS MODIFIER CE PRODUIT Si toutes les consignes indiqu es dans ce mode ont t respect es pendant son installation ce produit est conforme aux directives R amp TTE Toute modification du produit risquerait alors de g n rer des radiations radio et EMC dangereuses ATTENTION l antenne de l appareil devra tre situ e une distance de 20 cm au moins des personnes Ce produit ainsi que son antenne ne devront en aucun cas tre utilis s proximit d une autre antenne ou transmetteur AVVERTENZA IMPORTANTE NON MODIFICARE QUESTO PRODOTTO Se installato come indicato nelle istruzioni del presente manuale questo pr
191. e control units directly at each other and press and hold the button on the other device s remote control unit that you want to learn Once learning is completed normally the display lights and the signal transmission indicator flashes twice Other device s remote control unit Vo lt gt AVC A1HD s main remote control unit RC 1067 X f you want to learn other buttons repeat steps 4 and 5 X The mode can be switched by pressing MODE SELECTOR The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if learning was not possible Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed r e With some remote control units the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned In this case use the device s own remote control unit e Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory you no longer need the learned setting reset the learning function I page 69 e HOME cannot be Do not learn any remote control signals at RC SETUP The AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot be learned 67 23 zl z Izd E e Signal transmission indicator C AMP MODE is SELECTOR SYSTEM CALL POWER ON 1043409 RC SETUP llaq D gt ir Del
192. e das Ger t nicht mit Insektiziden Benzin oder Verd nnungsmitteln in Ber hrung kommen Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides du benz ne et un diluant avec l appareil Assicuratevi che l unit non entri in contatto con insetticidi benzolo o solventi No permita el contacto de insecticidas gasolina y diluyentes con el equipo Voorkom dat insecticiden benzeen of verfverdunner met dit toestel in contact komen Se till att inte insektsmedel p spraybruk bensen och thinner kommer i kontakt med apparatens h lje For apparatuses with ventilation holes Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Decken Sie den L ftungsbereich nicht ab Ne pas obstruer les trous d a ration Non coprite i fori di ventilazione No obstruya los orificios de ventilaci n De ventilatieopeningen mogen niet worden beblokkeerd e inte till ventilations ppningarna Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way Versuchen Sie niemals das Ger t auseinander zu nehmen oder zu ver ndern Ne jamais d monter ou modifier l appareil d une mani re ou d une autre Non smontate n modificate l unit in aleun modo Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de ninguna manera Dit toestel mag niet gedemonteerd of aangepast worden Ta inte is r apparaten och f rs k inte bygga om den CAUTION The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers tableclot
193. eble for all channels together Variable range 6dB 6dB Bass be set when Tone Defeat is set OFF Front Adjust each front channel tone Selectable items Bass Treble Variable range 6dB 69 Center Adjust each center channel tone Selectable items Bass Treble Variable range 6dB 69 Surround Adjust each surround channel tone Bass Treble 6dB 6dB Selectable items Variable range Surround Back Adjust each surround back channel tone Bass Treble 64 6dB Selectable items Variable range Subwoofer Adjust each subwoofer channel tone Bass 64 6dB Selectable items Variable range d This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other than PURE DIRECT DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode Select room equalizer current environment Dynamic Make Dynamic EO settings Selectable items Audyssey Optimize frequency response of all speakers Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers Audyssey Byp L R Audyssey Flat Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat response Manual Apply frequency response set with Manual EQ 1 page 33 OFF Turn equalizer off e Operating from the unit main remote control unit Press the ROOM EQ button on the main
194. eck Distance Check Ch Level Check Crossover Check EQ Check Restore The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated by MultEQ XT when Restore is selected 27 m Manual Setup Make detailed settings for various parameters Speaker Setup Use this procedure to set the speakers manually or if you wish to change the settings made with the auto setup procedure Menu tree Manual Setup Speaker Setup El Speaker Configuration Subwoofer Setup Distance D Channel Level Crossover Frequency D THX Audio Setup Surround Speaker El Speaker Configuration Select speaker configuration and size bass reproduction capability Front Select front speaker size Selectable items Large Center Select center speaker use and size Selectable items Large None 28 Subwoofer Select subwoofer use Selectable items Yes No Surround A Select surround speakers A use and size Selectable items Large Small None Surround B Select surround speakers B use and size Small Selectable items Large None Surround Back Select surround back speaker use and size Selectable items Large Small None 2spkrs 1spkr Large Select this for a large speaker with strong bass reproduction Small Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass reproduction e Select Large or Small not
195. ed after the Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Digital or DTS decoder Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for listening to a movie soundtrack in a normal home environment 81 E z 9 a Di en 5 3 3 E 5 Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theater there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you In a home theater only two speakers located to the side of your head are used The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers Adaptive Decorrelation In amovie theater a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience while in a home theater there are usually only two speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the cl
196. efully Hold the plug when unplugging the cord Gehen Sie vorsichtig mit dem Netzkabel um Halten Sie das Kabel am Stecker wenn Sie den Stecker herausziehen Manipuler le cordon d alimentation avec pr caution Tenir la prise lors du d branchement du cordon Manneggiate il cavo di alimentazione con attenzione Tenete ferma la spina quando scollegate il cavo dalla presa Maneje el cord n de energ a con cuidado Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el cord n de energ a Hanteer het netsnoer voorzichtig Houd het snoer bij de stekker vast wanneer deze moet worden aan of losgekoppeld e Hantera n tkabeln varsamt H ll i kabeln n r den kopplas fr n el uttaget Ww Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time Wenn das Ger t l ngere Zeit nicht verwendet werden soll trennen Sie das Netzkabel vom Netzstecker D brancher le cordon d alimentation lorsque l appareil n est pas utilis pendant de longues p riodes Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione quando prevedete di non utilizzare l unit per un lungo periodo di tempo Desconecte el cord n de energ a cuando no utilice el equipo por mucho tiempo Neem altijd het netsnoer uit het stopkontakt wanneer het apparaat gedurende een lange periode niet wordt gebruikt Koppla loss n tkabeln om apparaten inte kommer att anvandas i lang tid Do not let insecticides benzene and thinner come in contact with the unit Lassen Si
197. elect playback mode for surround back channels Selectable items NON MTRX MTRXON CINEMA MUSIC ES MTRX Es DSCRT DSCRTON 1 This can be selected when Surround Back is set to 2spkrs at the GUI menu Manual Setup Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration setting IS page 28 2 This can be selected when Surround Back is set to 2spkrs or 1spkr at the GUI menu Manual Setup Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration setting 3 This can be selected when playing DTS sources 4 This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a discrete 6 1 channel signal identification signal SB CH Out for 2 channel sources Determine whether to use surround back speakers Selectable items ON OFF 48 Subwoofer Att Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT IN input OFF Selectable items ON I Set this to if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing Super Audio CD Subwoofer Turn subwoofer output on and off Selectable items ON OFF Default Resets the settings to the default values E Tone Adjust the tonal quality of the sound Tone Defeat Turn tone adjustments off Selectable items ON OFF The tone cannot be adjusted when the DIRECT PURE DIRECT and HOME THX CINEMA mode Bass Adjust bass for all channels together Variable range 6dB 6dB Treble Adjust tr
198. electable items Auto PCM DTS e This be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu Assign setting is set to HDMI or Digital Only set PCM and DTS when playing the respective signals Rename Change the display name for this source Names containing up to 8 characters can be input Characters that can be input 2 2 0 9 amp lt gt space Source Level Corrects the playback level of the selected input source s audio input 12dB 12dB Variable range For input sources which HDMI or Digital are set at the GUI menu Assign setting the analog input level and digital input level can be set separately 43 m mes El Playback Mode Make settings for NET USB playback NET USB Input source USB Select Select USB port to use Selectable items Rear Match the port to be used and the setting Repeat Make settings for repeat mode Selectable items All One OFF Random Make random mode settings Selectable items ON Direct Play Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub remote control unit Favorites All Music Selectable items E Still Picture Make settings for still picture JPEG playback Input source NET USB Slide
199. electable items ON aa Setting with Respect to the Zone When the power of the zone turned on off the trigger out turns on Associated with the power supply of zones set to Setting with Respect to the Input Source When the input source set to on is selected the trigger out turns on Associated with respect the input source for zones set ON at Setting with Respect to the Zone 37 m ones Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode When the surround mode set to on is selected the trigger out turns on e Associated with respect surround modes that set This can be set if the MAIN ZONE setting at Setting with Respect to the Zone is set to ON e Associated when an input source for which Setting with Respect to the Input Source is set to ON is selected Setting with Respect to the Monitor When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected the trigger out turns on e Associated with respect monitor that set e This can be set if the MAIN ZONE setting at Setting with Respect to the Zone is set to ON Associated when an input source for which Setting with Respect to the Input Source is set to ON is selected Transducer Setup Set when using transducer The Transducer Setup be accessed through GUI menu Speaker Setup Subwoofer Setup is
200. emporarily In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound press MUTE Operation on the main unit Press lt ZONE2 ON OFF gt lt ZONE3 ON OFF gt or lt ZONE4 ON OFF gt for he zone to be operated When the power turns on the multi zone indicator lights on the display Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode you want to operate press ON or OFF Selecting the Input Source Operation on the main unit D Press 20 2 3 4 REC SELECT and select the zone to be adjusted 2 Turn SOURCE SELECT gt Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode you want to operate press SOURCE SELECT Adjusting the Volume Operation on the main unit D Press 20 2 3 4 REC SELECT and select the zone to be adjusted Turn VOLUME to adjust Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust press VOLUME Variable range 70dB 40dB 18dB The volume be adjusted when GUI menu Manual Setup Zone Setup select the zone Volume Level is set to Variable The volume can be increased up to the value set at GUI menu Manual Setup Zone Setup select the zone Volume Limit page 36 The volume for ZONE2 and can be adjusted with the remote control unit he sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu Manual Setup
201. ends mode so that bass interference is less likely to occur in the room e This can be set when the GUI menu Speaker Configuration Subwoofer is set to Yes e Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass e Select LFE Main if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer Distance Set distance from listening position to speakers Before making the settings measure the distance from the listening position to the different speakers Meters Feet Select unit for distance Step Select step smallest distance Selectable items 0 1m 0 01 be selected when Meters is set 1ft 0 1 Can be selected when Feet is set Default Resets the settings to the default values Distance measurement Select the speaker you want to set then set the distance Set the value closest to the measured distance Variable range 0 00m 18 00m Display when Meters is set 0 08 60 0ft Display when Feet is set Two surround back speakers required use the Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front lef
202. eo convert set to OFF Conforming to IEEE 802 11b Conforming to IEEE 802 11g Conforming to Wi Fi DS SS 11 5 5 2 1 Mbps Automatic switching OFDM 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 Mbps Automatic switching SSID Network name WEP key network key 64 128 bits WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK TKIP AES 2 412 MHz 2 472 MHz Conforming to IEEE 802 11b 13ch DS SS Of which 1 channel used Conforming to IEEE 802 11g 13ch OFDM Of which 1 channel used 230 V 50 Hz 630W 0 3 Standby 434 x 217 500 D mm 29 kg remote control unit RC 1067 Batteries Maximum external dimensions Weight LR6 AA Type two batteries 63 W x 238 H x 31 D mm 190 g including batteries Sub remote control unit RC 1070 Batteries Maximum external dimensions Weight Type two batteries 49 W x 220 H x 24 5 D mm 114 g including batteries Wi Fi conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the Wi Fi Alliance a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices For purposes of improvement specifications and design are subject to change without notice 98 List of codes Liste von voreingestellten Codes Liste de codes pr r gl s Lista dei codici pre regolati Lista de c digos pre ajustados Lijst van vooringestelde codes F rteckning ver f rinst llda koder
203. er system buttons 66 Input mode button ee 43 MENU button 23 D Cursor buttons V4 El 23 D Parameter Search button PARA SRCH 46 54 D Monitor select M SEL HOME button B Channel buttons Input source select Number buttons 40 52 Remote control signal transmitter 4 D Device select indicators DEV1 DEV2 64 B ZONES ZONEA select indicators 73 24 ice on exces ite bei Pt ond 78 D RESTORER button IRSTRL 49 D Night button 49 Test tone button 29 6 Surround speaker select button 5 30 POWER buttons RR 52 Channel select CH SEL ENTER button 4 23 63 Return button mm 23 9 Master volume control buttons 1 52 Muting button IMUTEL 52 78 amp Main remote control unit setup button RC SETUP nnt essetis 64 The time for which the backlight stays on can be changed 69 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit The SAT TU ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT 1 3 A DL RSTR INPUT SPKR TEST and surround mode buttons cannot be used Sub remote control unit RC 1070 CD I PHONO ee Shier VOLUME ALL MUSIC USB FAVORITES DIRECT PLAY Q ZONE Indieators eee
204. er was not properly detected e Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit e Check the speaker connections Ambient noise is too high Too much noise in the room for accurate or Level is too low measurements to be made Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away Try again when the surroundings are quieter Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing Adjust the subwoofer s volume None Displayed speaker could not be detected The front speaker was not properly detected Only one channel of the surround A and surround B speakers was detected Sound was output from the channel when only one surround back speaker was connected The surround back or the surround B speaker was detected but the surround A speaker was not detected When the subwoofer configuration is set at 25 L R 25 MIX 3SP L R LFE or 3SP the subwoofer could not be detected Check the connections of the displayed speaker Displayed speaker connected with the polarities reversed Phase Check the polarities of the displayed speaker For some speakers this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected If you are sure that the wiring is correct select Skip
205. es el producto aplicable a la directiva RAEE excepto pilas EEN AANTEKENING MET BETREKKING TOT DE RECYCLING Het inpakmateriaal van dit product is recycleerbaar en kan opnieuw gebruikt worden Er wordt verzocht om zich van elk afvalmateriaal te ontdoen volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften Volg voor het wegdoen van de speler de voorschriften voor de verwijdering van wit en bruingoed op Batterijen mogen nooit worden weggegooid of verbrand maar moeten volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften betreffende chemisch afval worden verwijderd Op dit product en de meegeleverde accessoires m u v de batterijen is de richtlijn voor afgedankte elektrische en elektronische apparaten WEEE van toepassing OBSERVERA ANG ENDE TERVINNING Produktens emballage r tervinningsbart och kan teranv ndas Kassera det enligt lokala atervinningsbestammelser N r du kasserar enheten ska du g ra det i verensst mmelse med lokala regler och best mmelser Batterier f r absolut inte kastas i soporna eller br nnas Kassera dem enligt lokala best mmelser f r kemiskt avfall Denna apparat och de tillbeh r som levereras med den uppfyller g llande WEEE direktiv med undantag av batterierna IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets R amp TTE directive requirements Modification of the product could result in hazardous Radio and EMC radiation CAUTION
206. etwork Setup Detail setting set DHCP to OFF Selectable items Yes No and enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway primary DNS and secondary DNS Curve is displayed after the auto setup been 4 performed 5 Default P isa Resets the settings to the default values This setting is required when the network 5 is established proxy servers Network Setup Make network settings At the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Detail Proxy setting set Proxy 5 to and enter the address domain name and port numbers Menu tree Manual Setup Network Setup EN Network Setup Other Recheck the connections and settings if you cannot connect to the Internet IS page 20 This completes the setting Network Information Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings For details consult a network administrator 33 ones Wireless LAN settings Make settings for wireless LAN Turn the AVC A1HD s power If no Ethernet cable is connected The mode automatically switches to Wireless To acquire the IP address automatically To enter the IP address manually using the DHCP function Connection Display GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup A
207. ff about 10 mm of sheathing from e the tip of the speaker cable then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it Insert the speaker cable s core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it Use speakers with an impedance of 6 to 16 O ohms When using surround A and B speakers simultaneously use speakers with an impedance of 8 to 16 O ohms Connect the speaker cables in such a way that they do not stick out of the speaker terminals The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the and sides touch each other CS Protection circuit Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected Doing so could result in electric shock Protection circuit If speakers with an impedance lower than specified for example 4 O ohms speakers are used for an extended period of time with the volume turned up high the temperature may rise activating the protection circuit When the protection circuit is activated the speaker output is shut off and the power indicator flashes red If this happens unplug the power cord then check the speaker cable and input cable connections If the set is extremely hot wait for it to cool off and improve ventilation around it Once this is done plug the power cord back in and turn the set s power back on If the
208. g headphones then 5CH STEREO is displayed 9CH STEREO is displayed when surround A B and the surround back speaker are used xoe 88 About Networks Windows Media Player Ver 11 This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation t can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player Ver 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA DRM WMA MP3 and WAV vTuner This is a free online contents server for Internet radio Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs For inquiries about this service visit the vTuner site below vTuner website http www radiodenon com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary DLNA DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and or service marks o Digital Living Network Alliance e Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED products Windows Media DRM IEEE 802 119 A copyright protected technology developed by Microsoft Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the icrosoft group of companies The PlaysForSure logo Windows Media and the Windows logo are rademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporat
209. gs Inc Denon Brand Company dichiara che questo AVC A1HD con forme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE e conforme alle seguenti normative EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 e EN50385 La dichiarazione di conformit pu essere consultata presso il nostro rappresentante europeo DENON Europe QUESTO PRODOTTO E CONFORME AL D M 28 08 95 N 548 DECLARACI N DE CONFORMIDAD Por la presente D amp M Holdings Inc Denon Brand Company declara que este AVC A1HD cumple con los requisitos esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la Directiva 1999 5 esta conforme con los siguientes estandares EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 y EN50385 Puede consultar a nuestro representante europeo DENON Europe acerca de la declaraci n de conformidad EENVORMIGHEIDSVERKLARING Hierbij verklaart D amp M Holdings Inc Denon Brand Company dat het toestel AVC A1HD in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG in overeenstemming is met de volgende normen EN60065 EN55013 EN55020 EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN300328 EN301489 01 EN301489 17 en EN50385 De eenvormigheidsverklaring mag worden geconsulteerd aan onze Europese vertegenwoordiger DENON Europe OVEREN
210. h iPod dock is assigned 42 X To cancel press the main unit s VIDEO SELECT button then turn the main unit s SOURCE SELECT knob and select SOURCE t is not possible to select HDMI input signals When playing HDMI video input signals the analog video signal of another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output Input sources for which Delete is selected at Source Delete cannot be selected Video Convert Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR OFF DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items ON For optimum video performance THX recommends that you set the conversion mode to OFF to use video signals pass through system without up conversion Example View video input from a component video on the component video monitor When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate If this happens please set the conversion mode to OFF Make settings for i p scaler function AtoH amp HtoH OFF AtoH Selectable items This set when Video Convert is set OFF e The A to H amp H to H can be set to the input source assigned to the HDMI input connector A to H amp H to H setting
211. h POWER Ba TI al E3 ZONE3 FLFR FETTE Nal DN Bi amp ZONE3 T SLA Bi Wiring SR A Gil SW Che dE c WS DEF Ge c e n lt H ES ES ZONE MONO Bi amp ZONE ES ES J Both installed for SR SL Both and can be installed for SR and SL I LI Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker 4 Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals terminals Speaker terminal SURR SURR B 2 s 5 Speaker terminal SURR SURR B FRONT Vesper SURA BACK amp assia AMP ASSIGN 2 FRONT SURR A BACK AMP ASSIGN AMP ASSIGN 2 CENTER Amp Assign mod RIL R L R L R L R L Amp Assign mod R L R L R L R L R L Normal FR FL C 5 4 SLA SBR SBL SRB SLB zu Nus ZONE2 Z2R Z2L Bi Wiring FE FL SR A 51 SBR SBL ess za Bi Wiring 2620 FL 5 51 sag 2E connection 73 72 ZONE Bi amp ZONE2 FR FL Z2R Z2L ONE MONO MONO MONO EM UEM FR FL C SRA SLA FL FR LONE 1 Bi Wiring 73 72 amp 7 connection MONO 75 Setting 7 With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes Setting 8 7 1 channel playback Miulti zone playback Free assign
212. hs curtains etc No naked flame sources such as lighted candles should be placed on the unit Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids Do not place objects filled with liquids such as vases on the unit ACHTUNG Die Bel ftung sollte auf keinen Fall durch das Abdecken der Bel ftungs ffnungen durch Gegenst nde wie beispielsweise Zeitungen Tischt cher Vorh nge o behindert werden Auf dem Ger t sollten keinerlei direkte Feuerquellen wie beispielsweise angez ndete Kerzen aufgestellt werden Bitte beachten Sie bei Umweltbestimmungen Das Ger t sollte keiner tropfenden oder spritzenden Fl ssigkeit ausgesetzt werden e Auf dem Ger t sollten keine mit Fl ssigkeit gef llten Beh lter wie beispielsweise Vasen aufgestellt werden ATTENTION La ventilation ne doit pas tre g n e en recouvrant les ouvertures de la ventilation avec des objets tels que journaux rideaux tissus etc Aucune flamme nue par exemple une bougie ne doit tre plac e sur l appareil Veillez respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque vous jetez les piles usag es l appareil ne doit pas tre expos l eau ou l humidit Ne pas poser d objet contenant du liquide par exemple un vase sur l appareil TTENZIONE Le aperture di ventilazione non devono essere ostruite coprendole con oggetti quali giornali tovaglie tende e cosi via Non posizio
213. ible with MP3 files conforming to MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 standards e When USB is pressed playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device The AVC A1HD is equipped with two USB ports one each on the ront and rear panels It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time Select the USB port you want to use at the Source Select NET USB Playback Mode USB Select menu DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVC A1HD USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power When using a USB connection type portable hard disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an AC adapter we recommend using the AC adapter t is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVC A1HD s USB port using a USB cable The AVC A1HD is not compatible with the iPod shuffle Operating theAVC A1HD Using a Browser Web control This function lets you operate the AVC A1HD using Internet Explorer 1 Check the AVC AT1HD s IP address GUI Manual Setup Network Setup Network Information I 35 Input the AVC A1HD s IP address in Internet Explorer Example http 192 168 x x The x is digits The AVC
214. igital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply processing to provide optimum replay THX Music Mode For the replay of 5 1 multi channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected In this mode new THX processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage THX Games Mode For the replay of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Digital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field ASA Advanced Speaker Array ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs
215. il updating or upgrating is completed Normally there is no need to use this function aside from the cases described below Firmware Update the case of applying the latest firmware updates free Add New Feature In the case of future upgrades to add new functions to the receiver payment required Information regarding the Firmware Update function and Add New Feature will be announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are defined Even with a broadband connection to the Internet approximately 1 hour is required for the updating upgrading procedure to be completed Once updating upgrading starts normal operations on the AVC A1HD cannot be performed until updating upgrading is completed Furthermore updating upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters etc set for the AVC A1HD When updating upgrading the firmware we recommend using wired connections Ethernet cable 39 m eu o Source Select E _ E Language Select the language displayed on the GUI screen Menu tree Manual Setup Language related to playing input sources Selectable items Input Source Selection Menu tree Source Select English Deutsch Fran ais Italiano A Espa ol Nederlands Svenska g Operating from the main unit X The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting D Press and hold the
216. in the surround mode to achieve the provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct same sense of presence as in a movie theater radiating speaker monopolar Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position mounted above ear level Surround Surround back speaker A Speaker Front speaker Z 60 to 90 Dolby Surround Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position Point slightly Dolby Digital downwards LA Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories A total of 5 1 channels are played front channels EU FR and Sumound Sumound back speaker 2 surround channels 517 and SR and the LFE channel for speaker speaker Surround speaker B low frequencies Because of this there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a three dimensional feeling sense of distance movement and positioning is achieved A real overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing Front speakers movie sources in AV rooms as well Center speaker Surround speaker B Surroun speakers Front speaker d 287 As seen from above seen from the side 4 60t090cm 7 Point slightly red 121 When not using surround back speakers Surround back sp akers Dolby Digital Plus As seen from above As seen from the side Monitor Dolb
217. ing from the main unit X The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting 1 Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least 3 seconds Video Format appears on the display 2 Use the lt gt button to make the setting 3 Press the ENTER MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting Text Text information display Selectable items ON OFF Master Volume Master volume display during adjustment OFF Selectable items ON NET USB iPod This sets the time the on screen display is displayed when an operation is performed OFF Selectable items Always 30s 10s Quick Select Name Change Quick Select display name Up to 16 characters can be input Input characters A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt space O Trigger Out 1 Select the conditions to turn the trigger out 1 with respect to the zone input source surround mode HDMI monitor etc For details about the trigger out function see page 22 Trigger Out 2 This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2 in the same way as Out 1 above Trigger Out 3 This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 3 in the same way as Trigger Out 1 above El Trigger Out 4 This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 4 in the same way as Trigger Out 1 above S
218. iolab Audiosonic Audiovox Avis Awa Baird Basic Line Beaumark Beko Bell amp Howell Bestar Black Diamond Black Panther Blaupunkt Blue Sky BPL Brandt Brandt Electronique Brinkmann Broksonic Bush Calix Candle Canon Capehart Carena Carrefour Carrera Casio Cathay CCE CGE Changhong Cimline Cineral CineVision Citizen Classic Clatronic Colortyme Colt Combitech Condor Craig Criterion 20081 20278 20037 20278 20038 20000 20000 20352 20037 20043 20278 20642 20046 20106 20104 20278 20046 20240 20104 20104 20046 20479 20278 20642 20278 20162 20081 20226 20037 20209 20278 20348 20352 20480 20642 20742 21137 20046 20041 20320 20041 20209 20348 20184 20121 20209 20002 20348 20479 21479 20081 20000 20209 20278 20315 20348 20352 20642 20742 20037 20037 20038 20035 20002 20081 20209 20045 20240 20035 20081 20000 20278 20278 20000 20041 20048 20081 20209 20278 21137 20035 20037 20240 20000 20209 20278 20479 21278 20037 20000 21593 20060 20035 20045 20278 20000 20352 20278 20037 20047 20240 20000 20000 20104 20041 20278 20035 20048 20039 20000 Crosley Crown Curtis Mathes Cybernex CyberPower Cyrus Daewoo Dansai Dantax Daytron De Graaf Decca Degraff Deitron Dell Denon Derwent Diamant Diamond Digitor DirecTV Domlan
219. ion in the United States and or other countries Content providers are using the digital rights management technology or Windows Media contained in this device WM DRM to protect he integrity of their content Secure Content so that their intellectual property including copyright in such content is not misappropriated This device uses WM DRM software to play Secure Content WM DRM Software If the security of the WM DRM Software in this device has been compromised owners of Secure Content Secure Content Owners may request that Microsoft revoke the WM DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy display and or play Secure Content Revocation does not alter the WM DRM Software s ability to play unprotected content A list of revoked WM DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC Microsoft may in conjunction with such license also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners About Wireless LAN Wi Fi Wi Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi Fi Alliance a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices IEEE 802 11b This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States It uses the 2 4 GHz band usable freely without a
220. justing the volume iPod operations NET USB direct play GUI menu and ZONE2 on screen display operations Zone power on off t is not possible to operate devices other than the amplifier OCT ZONE SELECT ZONE OFF 25 o 251 ZONE ON H SOURCE SELECT d Ce CHANNEL 2 JH d d SHIFT MENU 5 l ENTER 27 r RETURN SEARCH TO W Gi 1 4 4 gt gt l gt A WV 5 6 2 TUNING V ALL MUSIC FAVORITES USB CN REPEAT IE 70 Functions of Buttons by Component Device operated DVD HDP TV CBL DVR 1 DVR 2 VCR V AUX SAT TUNER CD PHONO Zone selection M 22 23 24 20 SELECT Zone operation mode selection ZONE OFF Power turned off 1 ZONE ON Power turned on 1 SOURCE SELECT Input source selection X2 VOLUME Adjustment of volume X1 MUTE Muting X1 MENU Selected menu _ USB X3 ALL MUSIC Media server only FAVORITES 1 Affects the currently selected zone 2 ZONEA it is not possible to select sources with no digital input signals iPod etc Network audio signals Internet radio media server USB can be played as long as they are not copyright protected The input source switches to NET USB and the files on the USB memory device are played X4 The input source
221. ker R speaker speaker L X L Left Right Subwoofer with built in amplifier H 414 NJ UJ NL NL 180 2 DVR 1 2 DVR SVAD ZONE2 Subwoofer with built in amplifier Surround Surround P Surround Surround speaker A speaker B speaker B speaker A R R Subwoofer 3 Subwoofer 2 L L Surround back speaker L Surround back speaker R I When using just one surround back speaker connect it to the left channel SBL When using Subwoofer 2 or 3 set GUI menu Manual Setup Speaker Setup Subwoofer Setup IS page 28 Connecting the Speaker Cables Carefully check the left L and right R channels and red and black polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVC A1HD and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly Peel o
222. le at Configuration differ according to the Amp Assign settings STEP1 Speaker Detection The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the first measurement position The following attributes are also determined at this time Speaker Size Channel Level Crossover Frequency Once the measurements are completed the results are displayed Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey XT Automatic Speaker Setup This is part of normal operation If there is background noise in room these test tones will increase in volume Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made This will cause inaccurate readings Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and refrain from talking Turn off air conditioning units or other devices that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected by these sounds Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after STEP1 STEP2 Measurement After completing a measurement position move the microphone to the next position Measure at least 6 positions main listening position and least 5 other surrounding positions For best results it is recommend measuring 6 or
223. ler X When using Windows Vista there is no need to download a new version of Windows Media Player 4 USB memory devices A USB memory device can be connected to the AVC A1HD s USB port to play music and still picture JPEG files stored on the USB memory device Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP Media Transfer Protocol standards can be played on the AVC A1HD The AVC A1HD is compatible with USB memory devices in FAT16 or FAT32 format Album art function When an MP3 music file includes album art data the album art can be displayed while playing the file Slide show function Still picture JPEG files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows The time for which each picture is displayed can be set When still picture JPEG played the AVC A1HD they played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder so store in them in the direction in which you want them to play Compatible formats internet Media server USB radio WMA Windows Media Audio O EN 1 Audio Layer 3 O O O WAV 4 O OF FLAC Free Lossless Audio O Codec JPEG A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network Only files that are not protected by copyright can
224. m the digital input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors and the analog REC OUT connectors Component Select component video input to assign to this source Input source iPod dock Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source Input source DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX TUNER CD Selectable items Assign None e With the default settings the Control Dock iPod used connected to the VCR iPod connector e Even if iPod dock is set to Assign if the set is not connected to a Control dock for iPod the input source can be used as the normal input source Video Setting the video source Video Select Switch video input source while listening to audio signal Selectable items DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 SOURCE g Operating from the main unit Press the VIDEO SELECT button then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until the desired picture appears DVR 2 V AUX DVD TV CBL SAT VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Selectable items 1 5 RCA 6 BNC None Input source DVD HDP TV CBL SAT Default setting 1 RCA 2 RCA 3 RCA 4 RCA Input source VCR DVR 1 DVR 2 V AUX Default setting None 5 RCA None None This cannot be set for input sources for whic
225. meister esonic etech eton evideon e e e e elestar e e e e eview Tempest Tennessee enson era evion exet exla hemeScene homas homson horn horn Ferguson 0054 0556 0556 0714 0499 0030 0847 0250 0556 0051 0009 0653 0009 0606 0009 0820 0054 0060 0876 0287 0017 0037 0394 0702 0819 0625 0486 0287 0037 0037 0037 0037 0037 0009 0009 0036 0163 0037 0009 0037 0009 0371 0009 0030 0037 0714 1248 0009 0780 0887 0047 1447 0287 0625 0035 0074 0335 0512 0073 0650 11267 10556 0717 1040 0343 10037 0717 10092 10335 10250 0051 10093 0036 10208 10698 0463 0178 0163 11504 10714 10587 10346 10109 10163 0037 10264 10037 10374 10556 0808 1298 10217 0178 10047 10335 10036 0109 10343 11537 10092 10556 10060 10178 10218 10217 10051 10226 1163 10180 10217 10821 10712 10560 10343 10074 10218 0218 0820 0698 0498 0335 0073 10764 10668 11037 10455 10343 10217 10715 10648 11037 11498 10218 10001 10037 10343 10037 10163 10361 0218 1037 0668 1137 1556 0374 1904 0109 0560 0073 0264 0499
226. more positions with a maximum of 8 positions on Speaker Distance STEP3 Calculation When Calculate is selected at STEP27 the measurements taken are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system interacts with the room time required this analysis depends the number of speakers connected The higher the number of speakers the longer the time required for analysis STEP4 Check Once the auto setup procedure is complete a measuring result check screen appears Select any item whose results you want to check to review the results I Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for speakers with built in filters subwoofers This is because filters add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated STEP5 Store The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVC A1HD Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored Error Messages If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation the measuring environment etc an error message is again displayed If this happens check the relevant items be sure to take the necessary measures then perform the auto setup procedure over Error messages examples Cause Measures No microphone or speaker e Included setup microphone is not connected e Not all speakers could be detected e The front L speak
227. n Megapower egas egatron H eile ercury ermaid etronic Metz GA MGN Technology icro Genius Micromaxx icrostar MicroTEK idland Mikomi 10047 10000 10060 10706 11254 10035 10037 10017 10264 10035 10037 11037 11454 10556 10009 0714 0499 10773 11755 11556 10009 10698 10037 10037 10698 11037 10700 10610 10047 11037 10264 10154 10150 10009 10877 10009 10060 10037 10625 10037 10447 11163 10150 10374 10178 10150 10037 11037 10808 10820 10047 11037 0053 1 1 1 10009 10264 11037 10487 10371 10208 10036 1 0250 11454 1267 0715 0371 1756 1982 0556 0817 0668 0860 0017 1149 0037 0668 10054 0704 0037 0706 0037 0744 0455 0352 0195 0035 0051 0512 0714 1137 0178 0250 0060 0035 1037 0001 0195 0587 0178 10036 10714 10715 0217 10264 0855 0698 10780 0011 10009 0650 1248 11900 0145 10009 1911 0009 10037 10714 10808 10051 10054 10154 10051 10180 10171 10092 11904 11755 10780 10011 0778 10876 10030 10037 0217 10374 10217 10218 0714 10556 0443 10433 0335 10217 0163 10037 0556 10668 0808 10880 0463 10180 0178 10030 0037 10195
228. n or the main remote control unit s D ST button is pressed DIRECT mode can be switched to STEREO mode Direct Playback Selectable items DIRECT In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high quality sound The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input signal For multi channel sources the display depends on the surround back output s play mode Input signal Display Analog signal PCM 2ch Dolby Digital source DIRECT DTS source Other 2 channel digital signals DSD 2ch DSD DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT M DIRECT PLIIx CINEMA M DIRECT MUSIC M DIRECT 71 DSD multi ch DSD MULTI DIRECT When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the audio parameters and speaker settings DIRECT or MULTI CH DIRECT is displayed 46 details see 87 Playback the PURE DIRECT Mode This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully providing extremely high quality sound Press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the PURE button on the main remote control unit e When in the PURE DIRECT mode the GUI screen is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off e f the HDMI input connector is selected video outputs are output in the PURE DIRECT mode The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same a
229. n updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed X If the display reads as shown below check the settings and network environment then update again IB Add New Feature Display the new functions which can be purchased for downloading to the AVC A1HD and upgrade When you purchase a new function and register your user information Registerd is displayed on this menu and you can proceed with the upgrade Upon completion of the upgrade you can start using the new function Upgrade Execute the upgrade process When upgrading starts the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down The amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed during the upgrade process When upgrading is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed X f the upgrade is not successful an error message identical to those Server is busy Connection fail Server is busy Wait a while then try again Failure connecting to server Display Description in Firmware Update will appear on the display Updating failed Updating failed Login failed Failure to log into server Notes concerning use of Firmware Update and Add New Feature n order to use these functions you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection For details see pages 33 35 Do not turn off the power unt
230. nate sull unit fiamme libere come ad esempio candele accese Prestate attenzione agli aspetti legati alla tutela dell ambiente nello smaltimento delle batterie L apparecchiatura non deve essere esposta a gocciolii o spruzzi Non posizionate sull unit alcun oggetto contenente liquidi come ad esempio i vasi PRECAUCI N La ventilaci n no debe quedar obstruida por haberse cubierto las aperturas con objetos como peri dicos manteles cortinas etc No debe colocarse sobre el aparato ninguna fuente inflamable sin protecci n como velas encendidas A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas respete la normativa para el cuidado del medio ambiente No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras cuando se utilice No colocar sobre el aparato objetos llenos de l quido como jarros WAARSCHUWING De ventilatie mag niet worden belemmerd door de ventilatieopeningen af te dekken met bijvoorbeeld kranten een tafelkleed gordijnen enz Plaats geen open vlammen bijvoorbeeld een brandende kaars op het apparaat Houd u steeds aan de milieuvoorschriften wanneer u gebruikte batterijen wegdoet Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan druppels of spatten Plaats geen voorwerpen gevuld met water bijvoorbeeld een vaas op het apparaat BSERVERA Ventilationen b r inte f rhindras genom att t cka f r ventilations ppningarna med f rem l s som tidningar bordsdukar gardiner osv nga blottade brandk llor s som t nda ljus far placeras
231. ng boards or wires from the speaker terminals Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals 1 i i i i Speaker terminal SURR SURR B AMP ASSIGN Multi Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function FRONT SURRA Gare AMP ASSIGN x The amp assign function lets you assign the amplifiers for the different channels built into the AVC A1HD to the speaker outputs for the different zones Amp Assign mode R L R L R L R L R L Select the desired playback environment from among Setting 1 to Setting 87 then set the corresponding Normal FR FL 1 SBR SBL SR B SLB Amp Assign mode at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Amp Assign I page 36 Connect the speakers as described at Amp Assign mode settings and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals With Setting 5 to Setting 7 it is possible to switch the Amp Assign mode between the 71 9 1 mode and the multi zone mode without changing the speaker connections N 73 Setting 2 With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes 7 1 channel playback Switching between bi amp and bi wiring playback using speakers exclusively for 2 channel playback Setting 3 Making bi amp connections for the FL and FR channels in the MAIN ZONE and conducting 7 1
232. nkai 00123 UltimateTV 01392 01640 GE 01175 Sagem 01253 01307 10706 10037 10455 10805 Sunny 01300 00724 00722 BskyB 01175 01662 Samsung 01206 01442 01570 01609 Aiwa 10264 10701 11904 11911 Sunsat 00713 m Bush 01645 Sat Control 01300 ou 10700 Unit i e Sunstar 00642 nite oota 00299 Schneider 10806 10831 10648 10672 Supernova 00887 Universum 01251 d Comag 01412 Schwaiger 01075 01412 10714 10715 11207 11537 SI i Akai 11675 11676 11903 10556 SVA 01455 US Digital 01535 D Digifusion 01645 Sedea Electronique 01206 10548 10480 10433 10371 Systec 01334 USDTV 01535 DigiQuest 01300 Serd 01412 10361 10264 10218 10717 Digiturk 01076 SKY 01175 01693 01848 01850 10208 0163 10037 10035 PRESET CODE Akashi Akiba Akira Akito Akura Alaron Alba Albatron Alfide All Tel Alleron Allorgan Allstar Ambassador America Action American High Amplivision Amstrad Amtron Anam Anam National Andersson Anglo Anhua Anitech Ansonic Aolinpike Apex Digital AR Arc En Ciel Arcam Ardem Aristocrat Aristona ART Arthur Martin ASA Asberg Asora Astra Asuka ATD Atlantic 10 10 009 10037 418 10037 10 10 11 171 218 037 10170 10 10 10 10 10 10009 163 371 668 10700 672 10865 030 10217 10 037 10150 10 10000 10217 10000 1003
233. not output from speakers Setup Audio setting is set to Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page No sound is e The Manual Setup HDMI Set to 31 No sound is eYou are playing a monaural The mode is set to something 44 45 output from Setup Audio setting is set to produced from source TV AM radio broadcast other than STANDARD Dolby the monitor Amp center speaker etc in the STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround or HOME THX connected DTS Surround or HOME THX CINEMA with HDMI CINEMA mode connections No sound surround mode is set to a surround playback 44 46 is produced STEREO DIRECT PURE mode Video from surround DIRECT Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page speakers e surround speakers power Check the setting and change it 36 73 76 The on screen e format of the GUI and TV Match the format of the GUI and 37 amplifier is assigned to a different as necessary display does not NTSC or PAL do not match TV channel appear No sound is e Surround back speaker setting is e Set to something other than 28 No picture e The connections between the Check the connections 12 13 produced from set to None None appears AVC A1HD and monitor are surround back e Surround mode not set to mode Select a surround playback 44 46 faulty
234. nput Output Video Conversion Function This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVC A1HD into the format used to output the video signals from the AVC A1HD to a monitor The AVC A1HD s video input output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video signals Digital video signals HDMI Analog video signals Component video S Video and Video Flow of video signals inside the AVC A1HD MAIN ZONE High picture gt quality playback HDMI connector Y PB CB PR CR Component video connectors S Video connector x Ss Ss V 9 9 Video connector Video inputs Le Y PB CB PR CR Component video connectors S Video connector Video connector Video outputs gt E When 4801 5761 signals are input in the MAIN ZONE Flow of video signals for ZONE2 ZONE2 High picture Y PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR Component video connectors o S Video connector quality playback Video Video inputs Component video connectors o S Video connector Video connector Video outputs Monitor ZONE2 monitor L
235. nregistr s en mode DVD codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo DVD Es posible guardar estos c digos preajustados en el modo DVD Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de DVD modus Dessa f rinst llningskoder kan lagras i DVD laget DENON www denon com Denon Brand Company D amp M Holdings Inc 00D 511 4289 068
236. nternet make the proxy server settings on the AVC A1HD in the same way ZONE2 or ZONES Pre out Connections f another power amplifier or pre main integrated amplifier is connected the ZONE2 or pre out variable or fixed level connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or the same time i page 73 78 When using a component video cable to connect the AVC A1HD and input device connect the ZONE2 monitor output to the component video connectors When using an S Video cable connect the cable to the S Video or the video connectors When using a video cable connect the cable to the video connectors e The ZONE2 ZONES video out is only for ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE2 2 Power 1 Power amplifier Monitor Monitor amplifier AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO IN IN IN IN IN Y PR GE d eng n k m E H s HE A SEE p wa Z Z Zx s CO NEZ NEZONSTZADNCZ AUDIO
237. ntrol Monitor Select the interlocking monitor through the HDMI controls Monitor1 Monitor2 Selectable items r This can be set when Control is set to ON Power Off Control Interlock with the power off function through the HDMI controls ON OFF Selectable items This can be set when Control is set to Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings When the Control setting has been changed always turn off the power to the connecting devices afterwards and then turn back on eThe HDMI control function does not work when the power to the equipment is off e For details see Control Function I page 61 31 2 suomnoouuo yoec 1043405 91 88111171 7 eut uols qnoul Audio Setup Make settings for audio playback Menu tree Manual Setup Audio Setup EXT IN Setup 2ch Direct Stereo Downmix Option Auto Surround Mode Manual EQ El EXT IN Setup Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from external input connectors EXT IN Surround Speaker Select the surround speakers to use Selectable items A B This can be set when GUI menu Speaker Setup Speaker Configuration Surround A and Surround B are used Ie page 28 Subwoofer Level
238. o format enabling high sound quality playback in 5 1 channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD Video p Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos Symbol DTS HD and DTS HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS Inc 1996 2007 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved M Home THX Cinema Surround HX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world renowned film production company Lucasfilm Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in both movie theaters and in your home theater as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages andare designed to be played back in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions The soundtrack created for movie theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On the AVC A1HD when the Home THX Cinema mode is on THX post processing is automatically add
239. o not match the monitor s resolution In this case switch the DVD player s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible f the GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio setting IS page 31 is set to Amp the sound may be interrupted when the monitor s power is turned off Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated a certified HDMI product for connection to the HDMI connector Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI logo is indicated a non HDMI certified product f the monitor or DVD player does not support Deep Color Deep Color signal transfer is not possible f the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC xvYCC signal transfer is not possible f the monitor does not support Auto Lipsync Correction function this function will not work e The AVC A1HD is compatible with the HDMI s CEC Consumer Electronics Control function Please note the following It may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its setup e t does not operate with televisions or players that are not compatible with HDMI s CEC e When AVC A1HD DVD player connected using cable also connect the AVC A1HD and monitor using an HDMI cable e f the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI D connector use an HDMI DVI converter cable When using a DVI cable no audio signals are transmitted Use a Deep Color
240. odotto soddisfa i requisiti della direttiva R amp TTE Eventuali modifiche apportate al prodotto potrebbero causare pericolose radiazioni radio ed EMC ATTENZIONE E necessario mantenere una distanza minima di 20 cm tra l antenna di questo prodotto e le persone Questo prodotto e la relativa antenna non devono essere posizionati in prossimit di altre antenne o trasmettitori e non devono essere utilizzati congiuntamente a questi ultimi NOTA IMPORTANTE NO MODIFIQUE ESTE PRODUCTO Este producto si es instalado de acuerdo con las instrucciones contenidas en este manual cumple los requisitos de la directiva R amp TTE La modificaci n del producto puede producir radiaci n de Radio y EMC peligrosa PRECAUCI N Se debe mantener una separaci n de al menos 20 cm entre la antena del producto y las personas Este producto y su antena no debe instalarse ni utilizarse conjuntamente con otra antena o transmisor BELANGRIJKE MEDEDELING BRENG AAN DIT PRODUCT GEEN AANPASSINGEN AAN Dit product indien geinstalleerd volgens de aanwijzingen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing voldoet aan de vereisten van de R amp TTE richtlijn Aanpassing van dit product kan gevaarlijke radio en EMC straling tot gevolg hebben LET OP Houd tussen antenne en personen altijd een afstand van tenminste 20 cm aan Dit product en zijn antenne mogen niet in de buurt van een andere antenne of zender worden geplaatst of in combinatie daarmee worden gebruikt
241. og REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL are PCM 2 channel signals Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors are not output to the REC OUT connectors so connect using the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE3 as well n the REC OUT mode the remote control unit s ZONE3 mode buttons cannot be operated When the Digital Out setting is set to ZONE4 Select the OPTICAL4 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output When using for recording set to Rec Select The network audio signals Internet radio media server USB are not output if they are copyright protected Convenient Functions Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder Control Function When DENON LINK is assigned at the GUI menu Assign setting When connecting the AVC A1HD to a television or player compatible with the HDMI control function the following operations are the PCM signals network audio signals Internet radio media server possible and USB input from the digital input connectors cannot be output Turn power Synchronize with television from the analog REC OUT connectors Switch to sound output equipment TV and AVC A1HD Input sources for which Delete is selected at Sourc
242. ome for long periods of ime or when traveling either press POWER to turn off the power or unplug the power cord from the power outlet Operations During Playback Adjusting the Master Volume Either turn MASTER VOLUME or press MASTER VOLUME Turning Off the Sound Temporarily Muting Press To cancel press MUTE again Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume Listening with Headphones Plug the headphones into lt PHONES gt The sound from the speakers and pre out connectors is automatically cut Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones Playing Video and Audio Equipment Basic Operation 1 Prepare the equipment the DVD CD or other software in the player IS See the operating instructions of the respective devices To play a video device switch the monitor input IS See the monitor s operating instructions To operate using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the AMP mode I page 64 Remote Control Unit Operations 3 Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source GUI Source Select 1 page 40 Start playback IS See the operating instructions of the respective devices iPod Playback The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for iPod ASD 1R sold separately The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main unit or
243. ones all the sounds resonated inside the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for long periods of time Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a room and places the sound at the front or the sides outside the head to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters This technology is mainly for multichannel audio video equipment with Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and works with a high performance digital signal processing DSP chip Dolby Headphone is effective not only for multichannel sources but also for stereo programs On the AVC A1HD it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them a separate recorder Sources recorded in Dolby Surround Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following logo marks Dolby Surround support mark Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS Surround DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS Inc compatible with a sampling frequency of 44 1 or 48 kHz and up to 5 1 channels of digital discrete surround sound DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS DTS ES and DTS 96 24
244. or playing the SB channel Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 10096 compatible with existing 5 1 channel playback systems so they can be played as such In this case the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal from both the SL and SR channels so none of the signal components are missing The effects specific to THX Surround EX the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the sound however are the same as with conventional 5 1 channel surround systems THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Used with permission Audyssey Audyssey MultEQO XT Audyssey MultEQ xT is the firsttechnology to properly measure sound information throughout a listening area then combine this information to accurately represent the acoustical problems in the room Based on these measurements MultEO XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in every seat Audyssey MultEO XT not only corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area but also performs a fully automated surround system setup For a detailed description see page 25 Audyssey Dynamic Audyssey Dynamic solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics Dynamic EO selects the
245. osest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater THX Ultra2 Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier performance pre amplifier performance and operation as well as hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain In addition to improvements to the power amplifier with respect to previous THX Ultra standards three surround modes have been added the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode 82 THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5 1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience In this mode new THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround Speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds DTS ES Matrix and 6 1 Discrete and Dolby D
246. ou JOK JVC K SAT Kamm Kaon KaTelco Kathrein Kennex Kenwood Klap Kocmoc TB Koscom Kosmos Kreiling 672 214 01801 159 01232 01412 01535 01284 01518 01523 01525 01214 01680 01700 01300 00775 00775 01775 01142 00749 01749 01442 915 075 075 01159 367 176 557 01631 535 334 01429 01672 00887 00882 00099 01214 00871 00887 00871 00455 00723 00873 00642 01334 00869 01450 00710 00775 01507 01531 01775 00713 00713 01300 01111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00123 00173 00200 00249 00394 00442 00480 00504 00658 00713 00818 01221 01416 01561 01567 0012 0085 0071 0133 01043 00442 01333 00249 00658 Oi 00125 00173 00299 00710 00882 01085 01111 01232 00749 00819 00455 01250 00863 01176 01225 01406 427 01675 01743 01790 Kreiselmeyer Kross L amp S Electronic Labgear LaSAT Lava Legend Legrand Lemon Lenco Lenoxx LG Lifesat Lodos Logik Logix Lorenzen Luxor Electronic vision agnavox anata anhattan Marantz aspro aster s atsui aximum cIntosh MDS ediabox Mediacom ediaSa Medion edison Mega Metronic MiCO icro Micro Elektronic icro Technology Micromaxx icrostar Microtec itsubishi Morgan s otorola MTEC uller 00173 01695 01043 01334 01296 00173 00299 01631 01718 01718 01334 00713 01611 01075
247. ox 10180 Z Zenith 11904 11909 11911 Orion 21479 i Magnavox 11944 ual B Beko 10486 x3 Pace 20352 Panasonic 11946 11947 D D Vision 31367 Black Diamond 11909 Awa 20000 20352 20479 20742 Pacific 20742 R RCA 11953 10 PRESET CODE Sharp Sylvania Symphonic T Toshiba X3 Sharp X4 Akai Emerson ESA Magnavox Panasonic RCA Sharp Superscan Sylvania Symphonic T Toshiba Nso m VCR A Mark ABS Admiral Adventura Aiko Aim Aiwa Akai Akura Alba Alienware Allegro Allorgan Allstar America Action American High Amoisonic Amstrad Anam Anam National Ansonic Aristona ASA Asha Astra Asuka 11917 11944 11944 11945 20807 30899 30821 30821 30821 31362 31132 30630 30821 30821 30821 31045 20037 20046 21972 20060 20104 20037 20278 20278 20037 20041 20742 2003 2031 H 5 20041 20081 20315 21972 20039 20240 20081 20278 20035 20479 20000 20162 31462 20240 20000 20278 20048 20039 20047 20121 20209 20479 20240 20000 20348 20642 20032 20000 20209 20348 20352 20479 21137 20240 20041 20106 20348 20352 20642 20000 20209 20278 20348 20352 21137 20081 20278 20037 20240 20278 4 20226 20480 20162 20000 20081 20037 20240 20035 20037 20226 21162 21562 20081 20240 20081 20000 20038 Aud
248. p Memory The various settings are backed up for about 1 week even if the power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights 3 Use to adjust the volume Quick Select Defaults OFF can be set by pressing lt when the subwoofer s volume 5 Input Source Volume 7 5 5 is set to 12dB Quick Select 1 DVD 40 dB Resetting the Microprocessor d Quick Select 2 TV CBL 40 Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations Quick Select 3 VCR 40 dB cannot be performed All settings are reset when the microcomputer is reset Fader Function To call out the settings press QUICK SELECT at which the desired Settings were stored The Quick Select name can be changed IG page 37 Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Source Delete iz amp page 37 In this case store them again This function lets you adjust fade the sound from all the front or rear speakers at once 1 Press CH SELECT 1 Turn off the power using POWER Pres POWER while simultaneously pressing STANDARD and HOME THX CINEMA gt Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 2 Press AV or CH SELECT to select
249. pa Europhon Eurosky Eurostar Eutelsat Expressvu Fenner Ferguson Finlandia Finlux Hair Mate FMD Force Fortec Star Foxtel Fracapro Planet Fracarro France Telecom Freesat FTE FTEmaximal Fuba Fugionkyo Funai Galaxis Gardiner Garnet GbSAT GE Gecco General Instrument General Satellite GF Good Friends GF Star Globo GOD Digital 601 Gold Gold Vision Golden Interstar GoldStar Goodmans Gradiente Granada Grundig Handan Hanseatic 00455 01251 00863 00299 00262 00299 00818 00713 00775 01775 00713 00455 01291 01743 00455 00455 00713 01251 01413 01457 01101 01083 00455 00497 00795 00879 01162 01176 01356 00871 00125 00871 00871 00887 00863 00713 00863 01214 01251 01801 00125 01377 00853 00863 01101 01111 01557 00818 01075 01214 00392 00566 01412 00869 01176 01043 01043 01251 01334 01412 01429 01626 00200 00775 01775 00853 01631 01283 00394 00455 01284 01291 00887 00455 00173 00345 00847 00853 00879 01291 01622 01099 01100 00173 00262 00299 00394 Hauppauge HB HDT Hills Hirschmann Hisense Hitachi Homecast Hornet Houston HTS Hughes Network Systems Hyundai iCan D Digital LLUSION sat iLo mperial ndovision ngelen nnova nterstar nVideo SkyB taltel Nokia Jadeworld Jaeger Jerrold Jiuzh
250. player s analog multi channel output connector To use with DENON LINK connections make the settings at GUI menu Source Select input source Assign Digital DENON LINK 87 page 42 18 External Power Amplifier USB Port Power amplifier Front panel 4 Rear panel AUDIO FRONT SUB CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND USB memory device USB memory device WOOFER A BACK B O 5 2 D A 1 1 n 1 A D D E 2 TERM GEES eem 5 Hi Av SURROUND AVC ATHD oS toy n the initial status USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel To change the port to be used see USB Select page 44 For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device see page 58 59 When using just one surround back speaker connect it to the left channel SBL Set to the USB port you want to use The AVC A1HD is e
251. protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems in the ventilation around the set nor in the connections the set may be damaged Turn the power off then contact a DENON service center 11 T s eh 5 2 T Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors With HDMI connections the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable DVD player Monitor HDMI HDMI OUT IN 2 1 0vo 2 HDP 3 SAD 4 0 mu 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 2 4 8 2 DVR 1 3 DVR 4008 E eit By default the HDMI audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the AVC A1HD To output the sound from the TV make the settings at GUI menu Manual Setup HDMI Setup Audio TV page 31 12 The AVC A1HD is supported to the feature of HDMI listed below 30 and 36 bit Deep Color e xvYCC e Auto Correction Compatible audio d Discs Details format examples 2ch 32 192 kHz CD DVD Video 2 hann l linear POM ear bits DVD Audio Multi channel linear 8ch 32 192 kHz PCM 16 20 24 bits pv ndio Dolby Digital DTS Bitstream DVD Video 2 5 1ch DSD 2 8224 MHz SACD 1 bit Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD Bitstream Bee DTS HD
252. quipped with two USB ports one each on the front and panels It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time Select the USB port you want to use at the GUI menu Source Select NET USB Playback Mode USB Select Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory deveice to the AVC A1HD s USB port Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference 19 Network Audio Wired LAN C7 V Internet To LAN port o LAN port Computer LAN port Ethernet connector Wireless LAN Vd GER gt CT 22 2 7 Internet Modem 1200201 ALIS L Rod antenna supplied Required system 2 Broadband Internet connection A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to use the AVC A1HD s Internet radio function and firmware update 4 Modem This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to communicate with the Internet Some are integrated with the router Router When using the AVC A1HD we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions Built in DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN
253. rding output source indicator This lights when the REC OUT mode is selected MULTEQ XT lc AUDYSSEY DYNAMICEQ NIGHT indicator This lights when the night mode is selected Multi zone indicators These light when the power for the respective zone is turned on B RESTORER indicator This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected D ADVANCED AL24 indicator This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is activated I page 83 D LINK indicator This lights when playing using DENON LINK connections Input mode indicators HDMI indicator This lights when connections playing using HDMI D Decoder indicators These light when the respective decoders are operating p ue1s B5uin 5 peuejs Buin 5 SPEAKERS RS 232C connector sss 22 Analog audio connectors AUDIO 13 PRE OUT connectors eee 19 21 EXT IN connectors ees 18 AC inlet AC IN 22 QO AC OUTLET nm n 22 ETHERNET A DIGITAL ASSIGN ABLE ml w COMPONENT SC i VIDEO ASSIGNABLE 9
254. registered The registered signals are transmitted in the registered sequence Punch Through Function CD DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT CBL mode buttons For example when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode 1 Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to punch through CD DVD or VCR 2 Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 4 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch through setting mode is set Press the button you want to punch through gt 44 gt P 144 gt ll 5 Press MODE SELECTOR for the device you want to punch through TV or SAT CBL Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 3 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight on time setting mode is set Set the light on time The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Settable times 1 5 sec 2 10 sec Default 3 15 sec 4 20 sec
255. rley Davidson arman Kardon eadquarter ewlett Packard 1 0 inari isawa ischito itachi oward Computers P 20037 20045 20042 20043 20209 20278 20348 20480 21137 20039 20047 20000 20104 20046 20209 20348 20035 20033 20037 20045 20000 0037 0037 20000 20278 21593 P B2 P rS gt 0348 20037 20000 20104 20278 20240 20432 20614 21137 20035 20037 20039 20000 20209 20278 20038 20225 20226 20480 21137 21237 0637 20642 20742 0037 0000 0240 20104 20041 0046 20226 0742 0348 20352 20742 20348 20352 20037 20081 20209 20038 20240 20000 20081 20038 20046 21972 20035 20047 20000 20240 20209 20041 20278 20352 20209 2035 20045 20035 20037 20081 20240 20045 20000 20042 20041 20046 20089 20278 20642 20081 71972 21972 0 2 0 g 0060 20035 20048 20240 20226 20320 20807 0 0 20037 20081 20240 20000 0209 20278 20348 20352 0240 20000 20042 20104 0037 20000 20209 20278 2 2 2 2 2 20035 20037 20048 20081 2 2 2 2 20081 20226 20320 20347 2 Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush Hypson Hytek IBUYPOWER Imperial Ingersol Interbuy Interfunk Internal International Intervision Irradio Nokia ITV Janeil JBL Jensen JMB Joyce JVC Kambrook Karcher KEC Kendo Kenwood KIC
256. s The input signals sampling frequency is displayed Format The number of channels in the input signal front surround LFE is displayed Offset The dialogue normalization correction value is displayed Flag MATRIX is displayed if the input signal has undergone matrix processing DISCRETE if the input signal has undergone discrete processing Dialogue normalization function Dialogue Normalization Dial Norm is a feature of Dolby Digital which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read Dial Norm X dB X being a numeric value The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels you may wish to adjust the volume For example if you see the following message Dial Norm 4 dB in the front panel display to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness just turn down the volume control by 4 dB However unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment HDMI Information Shows information about HDMI input output signals and monitor tree ke
257. s service radio stations that are no longer e USB memory device is divided eWhen divided into multiple in service into multiple partitions parutions only files stored in the For some e Station is congested or le Wait a while before trying again top partition be played radio stations currently broadcasting eFiles are stored in a the files in a compatible 55 Server Full compatible format format or Connection You are attempting to play a file e Files that are copyright protected 55 Down is 96 Sound is broken during playback Network s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested This is not a malfunction When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate the sound may be broken depending on the communications conditions Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy e File being played has a low bit rate This is not a malfunction Wireless LAN Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Cannot connect eThe settings of the SSID e Match the network settings with 34 35 to network and network key WEP the AVC A1HD s settings incorrect e The reception is poor and the Shorten the distance from the signals cannot received wireless LAN s access point remove any obstacles and otherwise improve visibility then try reconnecting Also install Specifications
258. s in the DIRECT mode Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on the main remote control unit Parameter Audio Adjust various audio parameters Menu tree Parameter Surround Parameters Tone Room EQ Dynamic EQ RESTORER O Night Mode Audio Delay O Audio Delay El Surround Parameters Adjust surround sound parameters The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes I page 84 85 Mode Select the mode according to the playback source T In the PLIIx or PLII mode Selectable items Cinema Music Game Pro Logic Can be selected in the PLII mode 2 In the DTS NEO 6 mode Selectable items Cinema Music The Music mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music In the THX mode 2 channel sources Selectable items Surround Back ON Surround Back OFF THX Games Mode In the THX mode for Multi channel sources Selectable items THX Surr EX ES ES 7 1 PLIIx Cinema THX THX Ultra Cinema THX Music Mode THX Games Mode Surround Back OFF Decoder Select this when playing analog PCM or other 2 channel sources The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode In the THX mode for 2 channel sources Selectable items CINEMA CINEMA ProLogic NEO 6 C
259. s k nnen im aufgenommen werden Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode SAT CBL codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo SAT CBL Es posible guardar estos c digos preajustados en el modo SAT CBL Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de 5 Dessa f rinst llningskoder kan lagras i SAT CBL laget These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode Diese voreingestellten Codes k nnen im TV Modus aufgenommen werden Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode TV codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo TV Es posible guardar estos c digos preajustados en el modo TV Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de TV modus Dessa f rinst llningskoder kan lagras i TV l get These preset codes can be recorded in the VCR mode Diese voreingestellten Codes k nnen im VCR Modus aufgenommen werden Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre enregistr s en mode VCR codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo VCR Es posible guardar estos c digos preajustados en el modo VCR Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de VCR modus Dessa f rinst llningskoder kan lagras i VCR laget These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode Diese voreingestellten Codes k nnen im DVD Modus aufgenommen werden Ces codes de pr s lection peuvent tre e
260. setting and speakers connected to the various speaker 728 728 2728 72 72 728 728 1 1 1 terminals 2 za zat 73 zi Speaker terminal SURR SURR B Z3R Z3R 238 Z3R 73 ZaR 7381 i FRONT SENTER SURR A BACK AMP ASSIGN AMP ASSIGN 2 X The above is an example of the selectable channels when Stereo is set for the ZONE2 and Amp Assign mode R L R L R L R L R L channel setting Normal FR FL C SR A SL A SBR SBL If Mono is selected Z2 MONO and 23 are displayed ZONE2 ZONE3 pie gt c Z3R Z3L Z2R 721 ZONE2 3 MONO Z3 MONO Z2 MONO 76 Nutt Zone Connections e For ZONE2 is necessary to set in sequence with the signal connected to either the power amplifier or bit stream amps The amp should be the power amplifier in the case of and the bit stream ZONEA e f the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog change to PCM 2 channel signal and output it from ZONE2 optical output connectors Connectors for audio output Audio signals Connectors for video output ZONE2 PRE OUT Stereo ZONE2 VIDEO OUT ZONE2 ZONE2 S VIDEO OUT ZONE2 OPTICAL OUT Bit stream ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 ZONES3 ZONES PRE OUT Stereo ZONE3 VIDEO OUT g ZONE4 ZONE4 OPTICAL4 OUT Bit stream Monitor MAIN ZONE 7 1 channel system FU Fe 5 Monitor B 9 200 8 m FL Sw
261. signals formats compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 71 channels of discrete digital sound High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound This format is fully compatible with conventional products including conventional DTS digital surround 5 1 channel data DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is DTS Inc s lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz 71 channels The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master It is fully compatible with conventional products including conventional DTS digital surround 5 1 data DTS ES Discrete 6 1 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 is a 6 1 channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back SB channel to the DTS digital surround sound Decoding of conventional 5 1 channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder DTS ES Matrix 6 1 DTS ES Matrix 6 1 is a 6 1 channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back SB channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding Decoding of conventional 5 1 channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder DTS NEO 6 Surround DTS NEO 6 is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6 1 channel surround playback with 2 channel sources It includes DTS NEO 6 CINEMA suited for playing movies and DTS NEO 6 MUSIC suited for playing music DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 is a digital audi
262. ssCom 01272 01272 01120 01010 01272 01190 01490 01126 01010 01456 01272 01324 01364 01272 01563 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01329 01126 01272 01805 01272 01300 01334 00345 00123 00713 00642 01259 01367 01418 01473 01491 00710 01514 00200 01811 00200 01043 00713 01232 01334 01412 00772 00713 01693 01801 00713 0713 01083 0455 01043 01075 00200 1 0 1 0 01300 200 01334 713 00853 00455 00713 01284 01659 00345 00713 00795 00847 00863 00882 01113 01175 Astacom Aston Astra Astratec Astro Atlantic Telephone Atsat AtSky Audioline Aurora Austar Axiel Axil Axis B ytronic Beko Bell ExpressVu Big Sat Black Diamond Blaupunkt Blue Sky Boca Boston Brainwave British Sky Broadcasting Broco BskyB BT Bubu Sat Bush Canal Canal Digital Canal Satellite Canal Centrex CGV Chaparral Cherokee Chess Chili CityCom Classic Clatronic CNS Comag Condor Continental Edison 00710 00142 00713 01743 00173 01113 3 3 0 00658 00847 00713 7 0 3 4 EB 008 007 007 0128 01811 00853 00853 00853 00853 01457 01413 232 700 695 00394 01695 00658 01099 01100 00879 01333 01433 00642 00863 00879 01259 01659 01232 01366 01251 01672 01175 01
263. suffisante lors de l installation sur une tag re Evitate di esporre l unit a temperature elevate Assicuratevi che vi sia un adeguata dispersione del calore quando installate l unit in un mobile per componenti audio Evite altas temperaturas Permite la suficiente dispersi n del calor cuando est instalado en la consola Vermijd hoge temperaturen Zorg er bij installatie in een audiorack voor dat de door het toestel geproduceerde warmte goed kan worden afgevoerd Undvik h ga temperaturer Se till att det finns m jlighet till god v rmeavledning vid montering i ett rack Keep the unit free from moisture water and dust e Halten Sie das Ger t von Feuchtigkeit Wasser und Staub fern Prot ger l appareil contre l humidit l eau et la poussi re e Tenete l unit lontana dall umidit dall acqua dalla polvere e Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad agua y polvo e Laat geen vochtigheid water of stof in het apparaat binnendringen e Uts tt inte apparaten f r fukt vatten och damm Do not let foreign objects into the unit Lassen Sie keine fremden Gegenst nde in das Ger t kommen Ne pas laisser des objets trangers dans l appareil Non inserite corpi estranei all interno dell unit No deje objetos extra os dentro del equipo Laat geen vreemde voorwerpen in dit apparaat vallen Se till att fr mmande f rem l inte tr nger in i apparaten Handle the power cord car
264. t FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 60 cm 2 ft Set the distance between the listening position and the various speakers to no more than 6 00 meters 20 ft channel Level Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers Mode Select test tone playback method Auto Manual Selectable items Surround Select surround speaker from which test tone is output Selectable items B A B Start Output test tone Variable range 12dB 098 1298 OFF OFF can be set by pressing lt when the subwoofer s volume is set to 12 dB Default Resets the settings to the default values g Operating from the main remote control unit Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the Auto mode and only effective in the STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround and HOME THX CINEMA modes The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory Adjusting using test tones CD Press the TEST button Test tones are output from the various speakers 2 Use the lt gt button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all Speakers 3 When the adjustments are completed press the TEST button again The level of each channel should be adjusted 75 dB Cweighted
265. t OFF Low Middle High 49 m Ei Audio Delay Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio Brightness Adjust picture brightness Delay audio This sets the delay time for audio signals Variable range 200ms mi Operating from the main unit or the main remote control unit X The GUI menu is not displayed when carrying out this setting CD Press the AUDIO DELAY button on the main unit or A DL button on the main remote control unit 2 Use the 1 gt button to set This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT IN DIRECT or STEREO mode with Crossover Frequency set to FIXED THX 7 Front set to Large Tone Defeat to ON and Room EQ to OFF The adjustment range is O to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync Correction function is activated Picture Adjust Adjust the picture quality Menu tree Picture Adjust Brightness Chroma Level Hue DNR O Enhancer Sharpness El Contrast Adjust picture contrast Variable range 6 0 6 50 Chroma Level Adjust picture chroma level saturation Variable range 6 0 6 Gi Hue Adjust color hue Variable range 6 0 46 Reduces the overall level of noise on the picture OFF Low Mid Selectable items High Enhan
266. ter language environment Power Saving Make setting for power saving when not connected to network Selectable items ON OFF I To use the web control function set this setting to OFF Character Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3 Tag played by USB Selectable items Auto Latin Japanese If the characters are not properly displayed when set to Auto set to Latin or Japanese PC Language Select computer environment language Selectable items ara chi smpl chi trad cze dan dut eng fin fre ger gre heb hun ita jpn kor nor pol por por BR rus spa swe tur Network Information Display network information Items to be checked Wired or Wireless SSID DHCP ON or OFF MAC Address IP Address Zone Setup Make settings for audio playback in a multi zone system Menu tree ManualSetup 1 O ManualSetup J ME ZONE3 EH osd J ZONE2 Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system ZONE3 Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system Bass Adjust low frequency range bass Variable range 10dB OdB 10dB Treble Adjust high frequency range treble Variable range 10dB 098 10dB HPF When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting HPF to ONT
267. than OPTICAL2 Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVC A1HD s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3 Video Cassette Recorder CD Recorder MD Recorder Tape Deck Connect the cables to be used Video cassette recorder VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL HDMI S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL AUDIO OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN E 3 gt x x x x t 1 DVD _2 HDP ao _ Se 2Z CY E ceres suns acr SEI AP ASSON mg um 6 8 8 1 8 S Ces Ie 5 a de lt AAA 2422 DES e When recording to a VCR it is necessary that type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVC A1HD VCR OUT connector Example TV IN S Video cable VCR OUT S Video cable TV IN Video cable VCR OUT Video cable When using a component video
268. to the Control Dock for iPod s operating AUDIO COAXIAL instructions 9 OUT OUT 5 L R Example iPod a L emm MONITOR MONITOR ZONE Q When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge use a commercially available MC head amplifier or a step up transformer When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio e Induction humming a booming sound may be produced from the connection make the settings at GUI menu Source Select CD speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected Assign Digital 87 42 With some record players noise may be generated when the ground wire is connected If so disconnect the ground wire e With the default settings the iPod can used connected to the VCR The AVC A1HD s SIGNAL GND terminalis meant to reduce noise when iPod connector a record player is connected This is not a safety ground terminal To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR iPod m
269. to the Port 1 RS 232C connector e When the 2way Remote is set to Used the RS 232C connector cannot be used as the external controller Trigger output jacks The power of an external device equipped with a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in association with operations on the AVC A1HD For details see GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup Trigger Out 17 Trigger Out 2 Trigger Out 3 or Trigger Out 4 I page 37 38 Output level 250 mA 12 V Check the trigger input conditions of the connected device hc asta 1 3 DON UNK E Ta PECO asser 22 To household power outlet 230 V 50 Hz 4 6 Power included NRI 4 8 2 0VR 1 30vR2 4MCRIZONE4 ZONE2 SK XI Connection to the AC outlet e These outlets supply power to external audio devices The power supplied from this outlet turns on and off together with the set s power switch Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 100 0 43 A can be connected e Insert the AC pl
270. tton on the main unit DTS 6 The signals are decoded in DTS NEO 6 for playback Cinema This mode is suited for movie sources Music This mode is suited for music sources CA Operating from the main unit The Cinema or Music modes can be directly selected with the CINEMA button or MUSIC button on the main unit Select the Cinema Music Game and Pro Logic modes at GUI menu Parameter Audio Surround Parameters Mode IS page 46 Playing Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc Selectable items STANDARD This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing surround sound The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode Input signal Display DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL other than 2ch DOLBY DIGITAL EX Dolby DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx CINEMA Digital EX DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx MUSIC DOLBY DIGITAL SES dis DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD DTS SURROUND PU te 075 CINEMA um eg DTS PLIIx MUSIC d DTS NEO 6 DTS us SCH DTS ES MTRX6 1 1 Surround DTS ES DSCRT6 1 2 Source DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 3 DTS HD High Resolution Audio PTSP HI RES DTS HD Master DTS HD MSTA Audio Gees ULTI CH IN Audio multi ch ULTI IN PLIIx CIN
271. u to achieve stronger surround effects not only with sources recorded in THX Surround EX but also with conventional 2 to 5 1 channel sources The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for achieving surround sound with up to 71 channels using surround back speakers for sources recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and DTS Surround 5 1 channel sources Furthermore all the DENON original surround modes 1028 45 DSP Simulation Playback are compatible with 7 1 channel playback 50 you can enjoy 7 1 channel sound with any signal source Number of surround back speakers With THX Surround EX the surround back channel consists of one channel of playback signals but we recommend using two speakers The modes that use the new ASA technology from THX I page 82 are most effective when using two monopole type surround back speakers placed close together Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back channel when listening from a position other than the center Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the sound at the rear Because of this the surround left and right channels play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back As shown on the diagram above in
272. uffling playback Press CHANNEL or RANDOM on the sub remote control unit AV lt b ENTER STATUS Selectable items Albums Songs OFF GUN Source Select input source Playback Mode iPod Shuffle I page 41 Searching up or down pages Press SEARCH then press lt down or gt To cancel press A V or SEARCH To switch between the Browse and Remote modes Either press and hold SEARCH e The title name artist name and album name can be checked by pressing lt STATUS gt during playback On the AVC A1HD folder and file names can be displayed as titles Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI iPod 5 page 37 Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions Press and hold SEARCH to set the Remote mode Remote iPod is displayed on the AVC A1HD s display SEARCH o CHANNEL Watching the iPod s screen use AV to select 55 Main remote control unit Photos or Videos Press ENTER until the image you want to view is displayed P RAMDOM TV Out at the iPod s Slideshow Settings or Video Settings must be set to
273. ugs securely Incomplete connections could cause noise Only use the AC outlet to plug in audio devices Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment Once Connections are Completed Turning the Power page 52 GUI Menu Operations With the AVC A1HD settings and operations for most functions can be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed on the monitor screen The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals component 1080 signal computer s resolution e g VGA input Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI We recommend performing such operations from the GUI Auto Setup Optimize settings for speakers in use This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to which this item belongs Example of Display of Default Values In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges the item surrounded by a border is the default value Selectable items 9 1 7 1 51 Examples of GUI Screen Displays Cursor Position Display Some typical examples are described below Example Browse Menu Top Menu DENON L Selected item name I 1 1 1 Mus MENS List of subsequent items 1 1 1 Guidance text for at cursor position
274. unit or the E button on the main remote control OFF Audyssey Audyssey L R Manual When Audyssey is selected sd lights When Audyssey Byp L R or Audyssey Flat is selected or when the auto setup measuring results have changed AUBYSSEY lights Audyssey Flat e Audyssey Audyssey L R and Audyssey Flat can be selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed e f the settings of the speakers for which None has been determined at Auto Setup are changed Audyssey Audyssey L R and Audyssey Flat cannot be selected and measurements have to be taken again to include the newly added speakers e When using headphones Room is always set to OFF Selectable items m Operating from the main unit Press the DYNAMIC EQ button e Dynamic is displayed when selecting Audyssey Audyssey Flat or Audyssey Byp L R in the Room EQ setup When set to HON tha TAUBYSSEYT inch re ON the indicator is lit ES the audio setup measuring results have changed ights RESTORER This function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound Selectable items OFF Mode1 Mode2 RESTORER 96 RESTORER 64 Mode3
275. used for applications particularly 3 will be automatically activated prioritizing sound quality Example Movie sources Dolby DTS Surround etc THX or THX Cinema mode Speakers A Music sources DVD video DTS CD etc Dolby DTS Surround Speakers B The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning HOME THX CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing multi channel music 80 Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic II is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater to create a three dimensional sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II matrix decoding technology Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7 1 channels There are 3 modes Music suited for playing music Cinema suited for playing movies and Game which is optimized for playing games Dolby Headphone This is a three dimensional sound technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd of Australia for achieving surround sound using regular headphones Previously when using headph
276. uter s operating instructions To cancel press A V or SEARCH Install Windows Media Player ver 11 e 5 Y Searching by first letter Character search Either turn SOURCE SELECT or press NET USB This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens 2 ES Internet radio stations or files stored the computer AMP mode to select NET USB When the menu screen is displayed press SEARCH twice GUI Source Select NET USB Play Use D to select the first letter you want to search for page 41 If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter they are displayed in alphabetical order T w s If it is not possible to search the list unsorted list is displayed operate using the remote control unit set the To cancel press or or SEARCH esce remote control unit to the NET DTU pEv1 mode io mol A IS page 64 Remote Control Unit Operations 22 id e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency MEMO Use A V to select the menu then press ENTER or gt components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound to select the file you want to play he default setting is Mode3 bad 6 The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI y A N Press ENTER or b menu Manual Setup Option Setup GUI NET USB AY A 3 201
277. ver Dim Dark OFF Selectable items Bright CN Operating from the main unit Press the DIMMER button m Bright Dim OFF lt Dark Setup Lock Protect settings from inadvertent change Firmware Update Update the firmware of the receiver Selectable items e When Setup Lock is set to the settings listed below no longer be changed Also SETUP LOCKED is displayed if you attempt to operate related buttons GUI menu operations RESTORER Night Mode Parameter Room EO Channel Level Audio Delay To cancel the setting press the MENU button to re display the Setup Lock screen then change the setting to OFF Maintenance Mode This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson or installer For professional use only This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the 1 58 status and make settings via the Internet Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer Check for Update You can check for firmware updates You can also check approximately how long it will take to complete an update Start Execute the update process When updating starts the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed during the update process Whe
278. ver s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files When you quit the media server and then restart it When music files are deleted or added on the media server Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP Media Transfer Protocol standards can be played on the AVC A1HD Basic Operation Make the necessary preparations e Set the USB port to be used GUI Source Select NET USB Playback Mode USB Select I page 44 Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port 2 Use AV to select USB then press ENTER or gt 3 Use to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or gt 4 Use V to select the file then press ENTER or P ayback starts once buffering reaches 10096 By default the front panel s USB port will be used Depending on the size of the still picture JPEG file some time may be required for the file to be displayed Selecting tracks During playback either press A previous track or V next track When playing still picture JPEG files tracks can also be selected using the operation described below During playback either press previous file or V next file f the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions only the top partition can be selected The AVC A1HD is compat
279. y Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is Subwoofer compatible with up to 71 channels of discrete digital sound and also When playing movies and music 60 improves sound quality thanks to extra bit rate performance It To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music we Surround speaker is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital so it offers o Kee E See Hees with greater flexibility response to the source signal and the conditions 5 urround Speakers e bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted a S i 5 the sides of the listening position p d 15 90 5 Choose Dolby Digital DTS without THX and Surround Speakers B dips Dolby TrueHD the direct radiating speakers mounted at the rear corners of the Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce listening room Then by simply activating the THX function used during movie playback the Surround A speakers are automatically z activated For multi channel music listening Dolby Digital or DTS speakers the sound of the studio master music programs turn off the enhancements touching the As seen from above As seen from the side This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 THX button the remote control and the Surround B speakers kHz and up to 71 channels so it is
280. y Set Identifiers For further security a WEP key is set and signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match WEP Key Network Key This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer On the AVC A1HD the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them 89 E E En 5 zi 9 3 3 ar E WPA Wi Fi Protected Access This is a security standard established by the Wi Fi Alliance In addition to the conventional SSID network name and WEP key network key it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access 2 This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi Fi Alliance compatible with more secure AES encryption WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Pre shared Key This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client Passphrase This refers to the code key used forWPA PSK WPA2 PSK authentication a WPA authentication method TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol This is a network key used for WPA The encryption algorithm is RC4 the same as for WEP but the security level is increased by changing the network key used for encryption for each packet AES Advanced Encryption
281. you are using Advanced Specify crossover frequency for each speaker 29 m ones Please set all THX Certified speakers set the Speaker Configuration for all speakers to Small We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to FIXED THX but depending on the speaker setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency eThe Crossover Frequency can be set when there are speakers that have been set to Small at GUI menu Speaker Configuration or when Subwoofer is set to Yes I page 28 e At the Advanced settings if the Subwoofer Setup IG page 28 setting is set to LFE THX GUI menu speakers for which Speaker Configuration is set to Small can be set If set to LFE Main the setting can be made regardless of the speaker size For speakers set to Small sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers O THX Audio Setup Set the speaker to play the optimal THX surround mode THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Set when using a subwoofer compatible with THX Ultra2 standards or a subwoofer that can be properly played at low range Selectable items Yes these settings when Yes is selected for subwoofer the Speaker Configuration settings This option is not available when No is sele
282. ypical improvement would be eight times or more xvYCC Next generation xvYCC color space supports 1 8 times as many colors as existing HDTV signals Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately Enables displays with natural vivid colors Lip Sync Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of the content synchronization of video and audio in user devices has become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex end user adjustments HDMI 1 3 incorporates an automatic video audio synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically with total accuracy HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LEG 84 Surround Modes and Parameters Surround Mode Signals and adjustability in the different modes Channel output Parameter default values are shown in parentheses Front L R cut Subwoofer D oMr DRC LFE d od PURE DIRECT DIRECT O x x x OFF Auto O 0 dB x x DSD DIRECT x X x X x gt lt x DSD MULTI DIRECT O O 0 dB x O x MULTI CH DIRECT 8 0dB O ON x STEREO O x 048 EXT IN

2 Use

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents